Woodward Easygen-2000 Configuration-Manual en 2017
Woodward Easygen-2000 Configuration-Manual en 2017
Woodward Easygen-2000 Configuration-Manual en 2017
easYgen-2000 Series
Genset Control
Configuration
Software Version 1.xxxx
Manual 37427
Manual 37427 easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
WARNING
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before
installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and
precautions. Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an overspeed
(overtemperature, or overpressure, where applicable) shutdown device(s), that operates totally
independently of the prime mover control device(s) to protect against runaway or damage to the
engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover with possible personal injury or loss of life should the
mechanical-hydraulic governor(s) or electric control(s), the actuator(s), fuel control(s), the driving
mechanism(s), the linkage(s), or the controlled device(s) fail.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical, electrical,
or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within
the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage,
and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging device, make sure
the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the battery from the system.
Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the following precautions to prevent
damage to these parts.
• Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to the control turned off, contact a
grounded surface and maintain contact while handling the control).
• Avoid all plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam (except antistatic versions) around printed circuit boards.
• Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit board with your hands or with
conductive devices.
OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that you
have the latest revision, be sure to check the Woodward website:
http://www.woodward.com/pubs/current.pdf
The revision level is shown at the bottom of the front cover after the publication number. The latest
version of most publications is available at:
http://www.woodward.com/publications
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative to get the latest
copy.
Important definitions
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in damage to equipment.
NOTE
Provides other helpful information that does not fall under the warning or caution categories.
Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Woodward is believed to be
correct and reliable. However, Woodward assumes no responsibility unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Woodward
All Rights Reserved.
Revision History
Content
Figures
Figure 2-1: ToolKit - Options window ..................................................................................................................................... 15
Figure 2-2: ToolKit - visualization screen ................................................................................................................................ 19
Figure 2-3: ToolKit - analog value trending screen .................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 2-4: ToolKit - configuration screen ............................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 3-1: Code level display .................................................................................................................................................. 31
Figure 3-2: Configure measurement - generator type selection ................................................................................................ 37
Figure 3-3: AC power triangle .................................................................................................................................................. 39
Figure 3-4: Monitoring - calculated generator ground fault ...................................................................................................... 70
Figure 3-5: Monitoring - calculated generator ground current - vector diagram ....................................................................... 71
Figure 3-6: Monitoring - generator inverse time-overcurrent - "Normal inverse" characteristic .............................................. 75
Figure 3-7: Monitoring - generator inverse time-overcurrent - "Highly inverse" characteristic ............................................... 76
Figure 3-8: Monitoring - generator inverse time-overcurrent - "Extremely inverse" characteristic .......................................... 76
Figure 3-9: Monitoring - generator lagging power factor ......................................................................................................... 79
Figure 3-10: Monitoring - generator leading power factor........................................................................................................ 81
Figure 3-11: Monitoring - phase shift ....................................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 3-12: Monitoring - plausibility check n/f ..................................................................................................................... 104
Figure 3-13: Monitoring - flexible limits - data source selection ............................................................................................ 121
Figure 3-14: Monitoring - miscellaneous – parameter alignment ........................................................................................... 135
Figure 3-15: Normally Open / Normally Closed contacts ....................................................................................................... 149
Figure 3-16: Analog input scaling - table (example)............................................................................................................... 156
Figure 3-17: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic ..................................................................................... 166
Figure 3-18: Monitoring - analog outputs - data source selection ........................................................................................... 173
Figure 3-19: Configure application - engine - preglow criterion selection.............................................................................. 177
Figure 3-20: Start /stop sequence - diesel engine .................................................................................................................... 178
Figure 3-21: Start /stop sequence - gas engine - successful .................................................................................................... 180
Figure 3-22: Start /stop sequence - gas engine - unsuccessful ................................................................................................ 181
Figure 3-23: Engine - firing speed and engine delayed monitoring ........................................................................................ 183
Figure 3-24: Engine - Auxiliary services timing ..................................................................................................................... 186
Figure 3-25: Automatic run - engine start conditions ............................................................................................................. 192
Figure 3-26: Automatic - Critical operation at busbar ............................................................................................................ 210
Figure 3-27: Automatic - Critical operation at generator ........................................................................................................ 212
Figure 3-28: Controllers - Behavior of the derivative parameter ............................................................................................ 216
Figure 3-29: CAN bus load/var sharing, diagram ................................................................................................................... 240
Figure 3-30: Load sharing - grouping ..................................................................................................................................... 243
Figure 3-31: Interfaces - Principle of PDO mapping .............................................................................................................. 250
Figure 3-32: LogicsManager - function overview .................................................................................................................. 271
Figure 3-33: LogicsManager - display in ToolKit .................................................................................................................. 272
Figure 3-34: LogicsManager - display on LCD screen ........................................................................................................... 272
Figure 3-35: Reference values - power factor scaling ............................................................................................................. 315
Figure 3-36: Triggering characteristics - three-level time-dependent overshoot montitoring ................................................. 321
Figure 3-37: Triggering characteristics - two-level overshoot montitoring............................................................................. 322
Figure 3-38: Triggering characteristics - two-level undershoot montitoring........................................................................... 323
Figure 3-39: Triggering characteristics - two-level reversed/reduced load montitoring ......................................................... 324
Figure 3-40: Triggering characteristics - two-level unbalanced load montitoring .................................................................. 325
Figure 3-41: Triggering characteristics - one-level asymmetry montitoring ........................................................................... 326
Figure 3-42: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 5 bar, Index "III" ................................................................. 327
Figure 3-43: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 10 bar, Index "IV"............................................................... 328
Figure 3-44: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 40 to 120 °C, Index "92-027-004" ............................................. 329
Figure 3-45: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 50 to 150 °C, Index "92-027-006" ............................................. 330
Figure 3-46: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram Pt100 ................................................................................................... 331
Tables
Table 1-1: Manual - overview ................................................................................................................................................... 11
Table 3-1: Configuration - standard values - configure language/clock .................................................................................... 26
Table 3-2: Daylight saving time - configuration example ......................................................................................................... 29
Table 3-3: Daylight saving time - examplary dates ................................................................................................................... 29
Table 3-4: Configuration - standard values - enter password .................................................................................................... 30
Table 3-5: Configuration - standard values - system management............................................................................................ 32
Table 3-6: Configuration - standard values - system management: password system............................................................... 34
Table 3-7: Measurement - standard values - configure measurement ....................................................................................... 36
Table 3-8: Measurement - standard values - configure transformer .......................................................................................... 42
Table 3-9: Monitoring - standard values - configure generator monitoring .............................................................................. 47
Table 3-10: Monitoring - standard values - configure generator operating voltage / frequency................................................ 48
Table 3-11: Monitoring - standard values - generator overfrequency ....................................................................................... 49
Table 3-12: Monitoring - standard values - generator underfrequency ..................................................................................... 51
Table 3-13: Monitoring - standard values - generator overvoltage ........................................................................................... 53
Table 3-14: Monitoring - standard values - generator undervoltage ......................................................................................... 55
Table 3-15: Monitoring - standard values - generator time-overcurrent ................................................................................... 57
Table 3-16: Monitoring - standard values - generator reverse / reduced power ........................................................................ 59
Table 3-17: Monitoring - standard values - generator overload IOP ......................................................................................... 61
Table 3-18: Monitoring - standard values - generator overload MOP ....................................................................................... 63
Table 3-19: Monitoring - standard values - generator unbalanced load .................................................................................... 65
Table 3-20: Monitoring - standard values - generator voltage asymmetry ................................................................................ 68
Table 3-21: Monitoring - standard values - generator ground fault........................................................................................... 71
Table 3-22: Monitoring - standard values - generator voltage phase rotation ........................................................................... 73
Table 3-23: Monitoring - standard values - generator inverse time-overcurrent ....................................................................... 77
Table 3-24: Monitoring - standard values - generator lagging power factor ............................................................................. 79
Table 3-25: Monitoring - standard values - generator leading power factor ............................................................................. 81
Table 3-26: Monitoring - standard values - configure mains monitoring .................................................................................. 83
Table 3-27: Monitoring - standard values - configure mains operating voltage / frequency ..................................................... 83
Table 3-28: Monitoring - standard values - mains decoupling .................................................................................................. 85
Table 3-29: Monitoring - standard values - mains overfrequency ............................................................................................. 87
Table 3-30: Monitoring - standard values - mains underfrequency ........................................................................................... 89
Table 3-31: Monitoring - standard values - mains overvoltage ................................................................................................. 91
Table 3-32: Monitoring - standard values - mains undervoltage ............................................................................................... 93
Table 3-33: Monitoring - standard values - mains phase shift .................................................................................................. 95
Table 3-34: Monitoring - standard values - mains voltage phase rotation................................................................................. 98
Table 3-35: Monitoring - standard values - engine overspeed ................................................................................................ 100
Table 3-36: Monitoring - standard values - engine underspeed .............................................................................................. 102
Table 3-37: Monitoring - standard values - plausibility control n/f......................................................................................... 105
Table 3-38: Monitoring - standard values - generator active power mismatch ....................................................................... 106
Table 3-39: Monitoring - standard values - mains active power mismatch ............................................................................. 107
Table 3-40: Monitoring - standard values - generator unloading mismatch ............................................................................ 108
Table 3-41: Monitoring - standard values - engine start failure .............................................................................................. 109
Table 3-42: Monitoring - standard values - engine shutdown malfunction ............................................................................. 110
Table 3-43: Monitoring - standard values - engine unintended stop ....................................................................................... 111
Table 3-44: Monitoring - standard values - engine dead bus operation................................................................................... 112
Table 3-45: Monitoring - standard values - engine charge alternator failure .......................................................................... 113
Table 3-46: Monitoring - standard values - breaker monitoring - GCB .................................................................................. 114
Table 3-47: Monitoring - standard values - breaker monitoring - GCB synchronization ........................................................ 115
Table 3-48: Monitoring - standard values - breaker monitoring - MCB ................................................................................. 116
Table 3-49: Monitoring - standard values - breaker monitoring - MCB synchronization ....................................................... 118
Table 3-50: Monitoring - standard values - mains voltage phase rotation............................................................................... 119
Table 3-51: Monitoring - standard values - flexible limits ...................................................................................................... 120
Table 3-52: Monitoring - flexible limit examples ................................................................................................................... 120
Table 3-53: Monitoring - flexible limits - analog value examples .......................................................................................... 122
Table 3-54: Monitoring - flexible limits - parameter IDs ........................................................................................................ 123
Table 3-55: Monitoring - standard values - CAN bus overload .............................................................................................. 125
Table 3-56: Monitoring - standard values - CANopen interface 1 .......................................................................................... 126
Table 3-57: Monitoring - standard values - CANopen interface 2 .......................................................................................... 127
Table 3-58: Monitoring - standard values - J1939 interface .................................................................................................... 128
Table 3-59: Monitoring - standard values - J1939 interface red stop lamp ............................................................................. 129
Table 3-60: Monitoring - standard values - J1939 interface amber warning lamp .................................................................. 130
Table 3-61: Monitoring - standard values - battery overvoltage ............................................................................................. 131
Table 3-62: Monitoring - standard values - battery undervoltage ........................................................................................... 133
Table 3-63: Monitoring - standard values - multi-unit parameter alignment monitoring ........................................................ 135
Table 3-64: Monitoring - standard values - multi-unit missing members monitoring ............................................................. 137
© Woodward Page 9/339
Manual 37427 easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
Table 3-65: Application - standard values - configure breakers.............................................................................................. 138
Table 3-66: Application - standard values - configure GCB ................................................................................................... 149
Table 3-67: Application - standard values - configure MCB .................................................................................................. 153
Table 3-68: Application - standard values - configure synchronization .................................................................................. 155
Table 3-69: Application - standard values - configure analog inputs ...................................................................................... 156
Table 3-70: Application - standard values - configure analog input table A / B ..................................................................... 157
Table 3-71: Analog inputs - table characteristics - parameter IDs .......................................................................................... 158
Table 3-72: Application - standard values - configure analog inputs 1 to 3 ............................................................................ 159
Table 3-73: Discrete inputs - terminal assignment .................................................................................................................. 166
Table 3-74: Application - standard values - configure discrete inputs .................................................................................... 166
Table 3-75: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs ........................................................................................................................... 168
Table 3-76: Application - standard values - configure discrete inputs .................................................................................... 169
Table 3-77: External discrete inputs - parameter IDs .............................................................................................................. 169
Table 3-78: Relay outputs - assignment .................................................................................................................................. 170
Table 3-79: Discrete outputs - parameter IDs ......................................................................................................................... 170
Table 3-80: External discrete outputs - parameter IDs ............................................................................................................ 171
Table 3-81: Analog outputs 1/2 - parameter table ................................................................................................................... 171
Table 3-82: Application - standard values - configure analog outputs 1/2 .............................................................................. 171
Table 3-83: Analog outputs 3/4 - parameter table ................................................................................................................... 172
Table 3-84: Application - standard values - configure analog outputs 3/4 .............................................................................. 172
Table 3-85: Analog outputs - signal type selection ................................................................................................................. 174
Table 3-86: Application - standard values - configure engine type ......................................................................................... 176
Table 3-87: Application - standard values - configure start/stop ............................................................................................ 182
Table 3-88: Application - standard values - configure MPU .................................................................................................. 187
Table 3-89: MPU input - typical configurations ..................................................................................................................... 187
Table 3-90: Application - standard values - configure idle mode ........................................................................................... 188
Table 3-91: Application - standard values - configure emergency run ................................................................................... 190
Table 3-92: Application - standard values - configure automatic run ..................................................................................... 191
Table 3-93: Load-dependent start/stop - parameters for reserve power operation .................................................................. 193
Table 3-94: Load-dependent start/stop - parameters for generator load operation .................................................................. 194
Table 3-95: Application - standard values - configure load dependent start/stop.................................................................... 196
Table 3-96: Application - standard values - configure load dependent start/stop IOP ............................................................ 201
Table 3-97: Load-dependent start/stop - dynamic influence on stopping a genset .................................................................. 204
Table 3-98: Application - standard values - configure load dependent start/stop MOP .......................................................... 205
Table 3-99: Application - standard values - configure critical mode ...................................................................................... 214
Table 3-100: Application - standard values - configure frequency control ............................................................................. 217
Table 3-101: Application - standard values - configure load control ...................................................................................... 223
Table 3-102: Application - standard values - configure voltage control ................................................................................. 229
Table 3-103: Application - standard values - configure power factor control ......................................................................... 234
Table 3-104: Application - standard values - configure load share ......................................................................................... 241
Table 3-105: Application - standard values - configure discrete raise/lower function ............................................................ 245
Table 3-106: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 1 ............................................................................... 246
Table 3-107: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 1: additional Server SDOs ....................................... 249
Table 3-108: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 1: receive PDOs ....................................................... 250
Table 3-109: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 1: transmit PDOs...................................................... 252
Table 3-110: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 2 ............................................................................... 255
Table 3-111: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 2: CANopen ............................................................. 255
Table 3-112: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface 2: J1939 ................................................................... 257
Table 3-113: Application - standard values - configure CAN interface: load share ................................................................ 260
Table 3-114: Application - standard values - configure RS-232 interface: serial interface 1 .................................................. 261
Table 3-115: Application - standard values - configure RS-485 interface: serial interface 2 .................................................. 262
Table 3-116: Application - standard values - configure LogicsManager ................................................................................ 263
Table 3-117: Internal flags - parameter IDs ............................................................................................................................ 263
Table 3-118: Application - standard values - configure counters............................................................................................ 266
Table 3-119: LogicsManager - command overview ............................................................................................................... 271
Table 3-120: LogicsManager - logical symbols...................................................................................................................... 272
Table 3-121: Relay outputs - terminal assignment .................................................................................................................. 276
Table 3-122: Analog Manager - display value format ............................................................................................................ 307
Table 3-123: Event history - event list .................................................................................................................................... 318
Table 3-124: Event history - alarm list.................................................................................................................................... 320
Table 3-125: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 5 bar, Index "III" ................................................................ 327
Table 3-126: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 10 bar, Index "IV" .............................................................. 328
Table 3-127: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 40 to 120 °C, Index "92-027-004" ............................................ 329
Table 3-128: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 50 to 150 °C, Index "92-027-006" ............................................ 330
Table 3-129: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram Pt100................................................................................................... 331
Chapter 1.
General Information
Document Overview
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Type English German
easYgen-2000 Series
easYgen-2000 Series - Installation 37426 DE37426
easYgen-2000 Series - Configuration this manual 37427 DE37427
easYgen-2000 Series - Operation 37428 DE37428
easYgen-2000 Series - Application 37429 -
easYgen-2000 Series - Interfaces 37430 -
easYgen-2000 Series - Parameter List 37431 DE37431
easYgen-2000 Series - Brief Operation 37432 DE37432
Information
Table 1-1: Manual - overview
Intended Use The unit must only be operated for the uses described in this manual. The prerequisite for a proper
and safe operation of the product is correct transportation, storage, and installation as well as careful operation
and maintenance.
NOTE
This manual has been developed for a unit fitted with all available options. Inputs/outputs, functions,
configuration screens and other details described, which do not exist on your unit may be ignored.
The present manual has been prepared to enable the configuration of the unit. On account of the large
variety of parameter settings, it is not possible to cover every possible combination. The manual is
therefore only a guide. In case of incorrect entries or a total loss of functions, the default settings can
be taken from the Parameter List 37431 or from ToolKit and the respective *.SID file.
NOTE
Some parameters, inputs, and outputs are dependent on the configured application mode
(parameter 3401 on page 139) regarding their availability and/or function. The following abbreviations
indicate the application mode for which the concerned information is valid:
{0} {0 (breaker control)} Application mode setting "None" - "Measuring transducer and engine
control function"
The control unit enables engine start/stop and generator measuring and protection – no breaker
control.
{1o} {1 (breaker) open} Application mode setting "GCB open" - "1 breaker control function"
The control unit enables engine start/stop and generator measuring and protection – "GCB
open" breaker control.
{1oc} {1 (breaker) open/close} Application mode setting "GCB" - "1 breaker control function"
The control unit enables engine start/stop and generator measuring and protection – full
generator breaker control for stand-by power applications with soft generator load transfer.
{2oc} {2 (breaker) open/close} Application mode setting "GCB/MCB" - "2 breaker control function"
The control unit enables engine start/stop and generator measuring and protection – full
generator breaker control for stand-by power applications with soft generator load transfer plus
emergency power, open/closed transition, and interchange load transfer applications.
Abbreviations
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The following abbreviations are frequently used throughout this and all other easYgen manuals:
CB Circuit Breaker
CL Code Level
CT Current Transformer
CCW Counter-Clockwise
CW Clockwise
DI Discrete Input
DO Discrete (Relay) Output
ECU Engine Control Unit
GCB Generator Circuit Breaker
IOP Isolated Operation in Parallel
LDSS Load-Dependent Start/Stop operation
MCB Mains Circuit Breaker
MOP Mains Operation in Parallel
MPU Magnetic Pickup Unit
N.C. Normally Closed (break) contact
N.O. Normally Open (make) contact
PF Power Factor
PID Proportional Integral Derivative controller
PLC Programmable Logic Control
P/N Part Number
PT Potential (Voltage) Transformer
S/N Serial Number
Chapter 2.
Configuration
CAUTION
Woodward’s ToolKit software (version 3.1 or higher) is required when configuring the unit via a PC.
ToolKit from 3.1
If not already installed, download and install the ToolKit software. Please proceed as follows for this:
NOTE
Please note that you must register on the website prior to downloading the software.
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 must be installed on your computer to be able to install ToolKit. If not
already installed, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 will be installed automatically. You must be connected
to the internet for this.
NOTE
If your computer is equipped with a Bluetooth interface please deactivate it temporary for the case that
ToolKit is freezing building up a connection.
Configure ToolKit
Open ToolKit via Start menu -> Program ->Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
You may configure the default settings of ToolKit by selecting Tools -> Options from the toolbar. The options
window will be displayed where you may select the default COM port and the default path for the configuration
files. We recommend configuring a dedicated ToolKit data file directory (e.g. C:\Data\ToolKit) instead of storing
the configuration files in the ToolKit installation directory (e.g. C:\Program Files\Woodward\ToolKit). The
changes become effective after restarting ToolKit.
NOTE
Be sure to have the correct *.SID and *.WTOOL files for your unit ready. The SID file must not be
renamed!
When installing the *.SID and *.WTOOL files on a computer, it is recommended to create a dedicated
ToolKit data file external to the ToolKit program. An example of this would be to create a Woodward
ToolKit folder in a Data directory to store the *.SID and *.WTOOL files. The data files should be kept
separate from the program files. Mixing data and program files makes backing up files more difficult
and uninstalling the files incomplete.
ToolKit Files
ToolKit is using the following files:
*.WTOOL
File name composition: [P/N1]-[Revision]_[Language ID]_[P/N2]-[Revision]_[# of visualized gens].WTOOL
Example file name: 8440-1884-NEW_US_5418-3090-NEW_32.WTOOL
Content of the file: Display screens and pages for online configuration, which are associated with the
respective *.SID file
*.SID
File name composition: [P/N2]-[Revision].SID
Example file name: 5418-3090-NEW.SID
Content of the file: All display and configuration parameters available in ToolKit
*.WSET
File name composition: [user defined].WSET
Example file name: easYgen_settings.WSET
Content of the file: Default settings of the ToolKit configuration parameters provided by the SID file or
user-defined settings read out of the unit.
NOTE
The P/N2 and revision information in the *.SID file name is used for identifying the unit and must not be
renamed.
When opening a *.WTOOL file, ToolKit will look for the respective SID file in the SID file location,
configured in the Options dialog (refer to Figure 2-1).
The *.SID files have identical names regardless of the language and are located in the respective
language folders delivered with the unit. If it happens that you need to switch between different
languages in ToolKit, we recommend to store your *.SID (and *.WTOOL & *.WSET) files in different
folders to avoid confusion. In this case you only need to change the path information as described
under Configure ToolKit on page 15 to switch the language. Refer to the Language-Dependent SID Files
section on page 17 for more details.
If it is required that both language versions of the *.sid file are stored on the computer, because the user wants to
be able to switch between the languages, the *.sid files need to be stored in separate subfolders and the subfolder
name needs to show the name of the appropriate language.
If the user needs to change the language, the appropriate *.sid file needs to be selected by using the ToolKit menu
Tools -> Options -> SID file directories. The folder with the desired language needs to be on top position.
ToolKit needs to be closed and the *.wtool file must be opened again, to ensure that the new *.sid file will be
loaded.
SID Files for Using ToolKit on the CAN Bus With Other CANopen Devices
If a PC with ToolKit is connected to the easYgen via a CAN bus with other external CANopen devices (like a
Phoenix Contact I/O expansion board, for example), it may happen that ToolKit cannot establish a connection
with the easYgen because it looks for a SID file for such an external device, which does not exist.
A special *.sid file can be created in this case. Contact Woodward for support or create a *.sid file with the
following content:
The file name must be the same as the Identifier plus the extension *.sid. The file must be stored to the
configured SID file directory.
Select from the ToolKit menu Settings -> Save from Device to File… to store the current easYgen settings (note
that the correct *.sid file is available). Then select from the ToolKit menu Settings -> Load Settings File to
Device… to load the stored settings into a different easYgen (take care that you provide the correct *.sid file in
the same language that was used to store the *.wset file). If the P/Ns and/or revisions of the easYgens differ, you
will be prompted to resolve the differences. If you are sure that the *.wset file is compatible with the easYgen,
proceed with Next. If you are not sure, proceed with Resolve Differences (please note that this feature is not
supported properly by the CANopen driver). If you select Resolve Differences it may take some minutes until the
next window opens, because ToolKit reads out all settings from the device to compare them with those in the
*.wset file. Then, a Compare Differences window will open and display all differences in value and/or parameter
name. Most of the name differences can be mapped according to the same index number within the parameter
name. Settings of parameters with selectable options cannot be mapped.
Verify all settings after loading them into the different easYgen! To verify the settings save them again from the
easYgen to a *.wset file. Then select ftom the ToolKit menu Settings -> Compare Settings File Differences and
open both, the (old) *.wset file loaded into the easYgen before, and the newly saved *.wset file. If there are no
value differences displayed, the load process was successful. If there are any value differences, take care that they
will be adjusted properly.
If there are any name differences, take care that the settings of the new parameters will be verified to fit the
application purpose.
• Connect the null modem communications cable between your laptop/PC and the control unit. Plug the null
modem cable into the RS-232 serial port on unit and the other side to a serial COM port of the laptop/PC. If
the laptop/PC does not have a serial port to connect the null modem cable to, use a USB to serial adapter.
• Open ToolKit via Start menu -> All Programs -> Woodward -> ToolKit 3.x
• From the main ToolKit window, click File then select Open Tool..., or click the Open Tool icon on the
tool bar.
• Locate and select the desired tool file (*.WTOOL) in the ToolKit data file directory and click Open.
• From the main ToolKit window, click Device then click Connect, or select the Connect icon on the
toolbar.
• The Connect dialog window will open if the option is enabled.
• Select the COM port that is connected to the communication cable.
• Click the OK button.
• If the Communications window opens, select ToolConfigurator under Tool Device and close the
Communications window.
• The identifier of the device that ToolKit is connected to will display in the status bar.
• Now you are able to edit the easYgen parameters. Any changes made are written to the control memory
automatically.
NOTE
A null modem serial cable must be used for communicating with the easYgen-2000 Series to ensure
that the controller functions properly. The connection will not work if you are using a straight cable (a
null modem cable has crosslinked transmit and receive lines in contrast to a straight serial cable).
NOTE
Depending on the computer used and the installed operation system, problems with the
communication via an infrared connection may occur.
NOTE
It is also possible to connect to the unit via CAN bus. If a suitable CAN adapter is used, this may be
selected in the Connect window. We recommend to use the IXXAT USB-to-CAN converter using the VCI
V3 driver.
Be sure to configure the correct baud rate and timeout in the Properties dialog of the Connect window.
The Password for CAN Interface 1 (parameter 10402 on page 31) must be entered before being able to
edit the parameters.
Navigation through the various visualization and configuration screens is performed by clicking on the
and icons, by selecting a navigation button, or by selecting a screen from the drop-down list to the right of
the arrow icons.
It is possible to view a trend chart of up to eight values with the trending tool utility of ToolKit. The following
figure shows a trending screen of the measured battery voltage value:
Each visualization screen provides for trending of monitored values by right-clicking on a value and selecting the
"Add to trend" function. Trending is initiated by clicking on the Start button. Clicking the Export… button will
save the trend data to a Comma Separated Values (CSV) file for viewing, editing or printing with office software,
like Microsoft Excel, etc. The Properties… button is used to define high and low limits of the scale, sample rate,
displayed time span and color of the graph. The trend functionality is not available if ToolKit is used utilizing a
CAN bus connection to the unit.
Entering a new value or selecting a value from a defined list will change the value in a field. The new value is
written to the controller memory by changing to a new field or pressing the Enter key.
Navigation through the various configuration and visualization screens is performed by clicking on the
and icons, by selecting a navigation button, or by selecting a screen from the drop-down list to the right of
the arrow icons.
Refer to the ToolKit Help for a description of working with settings. From the main ToolKit window, click Help
then click Help Contents to open the ToolKit Help window.
• programmable
The discrete input has been assigned a default function using either the LogicsManager or preconfigured
alarms such as "emergency stop". The following text describes how these functions are assigned. It is possible
to change the function of the discrete input if required.
The following description of the inputs, labeled with programmable, refers to the preconfiguration.
• fixed
The discrete input has a specific function that cannot be changed depending upon the configured application
mode.
Emergency stop {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 1], terminals 43/44
This discrete input is configured as alarm class F and is not delayed by the engine speed.
Start request in AUTO {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 2], terminals 43/45
Enabled in the AUTOMATIC operation mode
energized ..... If the unit is in the AUTOMATIC operation mode (selected with the operating mode
selection push button on the front panel) the controlled engine is started automatically.
de-energized The engine is stopped.
This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm class and is not delayed by the engine
speed.
Low oil pressure {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 3], terminals 43/46
This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is delayed by the engine speed.
Coolant temperature {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 4], terminals 43/47
This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is not delayed by the engine speed.
External acknowledgement {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 5], term. 43/48
This discrete input is used as a remote acknowledgement for alarms. The input is normally de-
energized. When an alarm is to be acknowledged the input is energized. The first time an alarm in
acknowledged, the centralized alarm/horn is silenced. When the input is energized a second time, all
alarms, which are no longer active, will be acknowledged.
This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm class and is not delayed by the engine
speed.
Release MCB {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 6], terminals 43/49
energized ..... The MCB is enabled and closure of the breaker is permitted.
de-energized The MCB is not enabled and closure of the breaker is not permitted. This function
permits a supervisory control (i.e. a PLC) to allow the closure of the MCB by the
easYgen.
This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm class and is not delayed by the engine
speed.
Reply MCB {2oc} programmable, pre-configured to discrete input [DI 7], terminals 43/50
Note: Negative logic function!
The controller utilizes the CB auxiliary (B) contacts into this discrete input to reflect the state of the
MCB. This discrete input must be energized to show when the breaker is open and de-energized to
show when the MCB is closed. The status of the MCB is displayed on the screen.
This input is used in all breaker modes to change between frequency/voltage and power/power factor
control (refer to below note).
Reply GCB {1oc} or {2oc} fixed to discrete input [DI 8], terminals 43/51
Note: Negative function logic!
The controller utilizes the CB auxiliary (B) contacts into this discrete input to reflect the state of the
GCB. This discrete input must be energized to show when the breaker is open and de-energized to show
when the GCB is closed. The status of the GCB is displayed on the screen.
This input is used in all breaker modes to enable reverse power protection, overload MOP protection,
mains decoupling and the activation of the load sharing (refer to below note).
Discrete Input 9 {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 9], terminals 75/76
This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is not delayed by the engine speed.
Discrete Input 10 {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured for discrete input [DI 10], terminals 75/77
This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is not delayed by the engine speed.
NOTE
The easYgen decides whether it performs voltage and frequency (V/f) control or power and power
factor (P/PF) control using the reply of the circuit breakers, i.e. the discrete inputs DI 7 and DI 8.
If the GCB is open, only V/f control is performed
If the GCB is closed and the MCB is open, V/f control as well as active and reactive power load sharing
is performed
If the GCB is closed and the MCB is closed, P/PF control or import power control with load sharing and
PF control is performed.
Discrete Outputs
The discrete outputs can be grouped into two categories:
• programmable
The discrete output has been assigned a default function using the LogicsManager. The following text
describes how these functions are assigned using the LogicsManager. It is possible to change the function of
the discrete output if required.
The following description of the outputs, labeled with programmable, refers to the preconfiguration.
• fixed
The discrete output has a specific function that cannot be changed depending upon the configured application
mode. The discrete output cannot be viewed or changed in the LogicsManager.
NOTE
The discrete outputs can be "programmable" or "fixed" depending on the application mode
(parameter 3401 on page 139). Table 3-78 on page 170 defines the function of the discrete outputs
according to the configured application mode.
Ready for operation OFF {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} fixed to relay [R1], terminals 30/31
This discrete output is used to ensure that the internal functions of the controller are operating properly.
It is possible to configure additional events, which cause the contacts of this discrete output to open,
using the LogicsManager.
CAUTION
The discrete output "Ready for operation OFF" must be wired in series with an emergency stop
function. This means that it must be ensured that the generator circuit breaker is opened and the
engine is stopped if this discrete output is de-energeized. We recommend to signal this fault
independently from the unit if the availability of the plant is important.
Centralized alarm {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable to relay [R2], terminals 32/33
When a centralized alarm is issued, this discrete output is enabled. A horn or a buzzer maybe activated
via this discrete output. Pressing the button next to the "" symbol will acknowledge the centralized
alarm and disable this discrete output. The discrete output will re-enable if a new fault condition
resulting in a centralized alarm occurs. The centralized alarm is initiated by class B alarms or higher.
Starter {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable to relay [R3], terminals 34/35
The generator starting circuit is engaged when this discrete output is enabled. This discrete output will
enable depending on the start sequence (refer to the start sequence description in the Configure
Application: Configure Engine section starting on page 176) to energize the starter for the configured
starter time (parameter 3306 on page 182.
Fuel solenoid / gas valve (Diesel / gas engine) {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable to relay [R4], terminals 36/37
Fuel solenoid: The fuel solenoid for the diesel engine is energized when this discrete output is enabled.
If the engine is given a stop command or engine speed drops below the configured firing speed, this
discrete output is disabled immediately.
Gas valve: The gas valve for the engine is energized when this discrete output is enabled. If the engine
is given a stop command or engine speed drops below the configured firing speed, this discrete output is
disabled immediately.
CAUTION
The circuit breaker commands must be checked before every commissioning because the relays can
be used for different applications and can be assigened to various functions. Please make sure that all
relay outputs are configured correctly.
Command: close GCB {1oc} or {2oc} fixed to relay [R6], terminals 41/42
The "Command: close GCB" output issues the signal for the GCB to close. This relay may be
configured as an impulse or constant output signal depending on parameter 3414 on page 150.
If the output is configured as "Impulse", the discrete output will enable for the time configured in
parameter 3416 on page 150). An external holding coil and sealing contacts must be installed into the
GCB closing circuit if this discrete output is configured for an impulse output signal.
If the relay is configured as "Constant", the relay will energize and remain enabled as long as the
discrete input "Reply GCB" remains de-energized and the generator and busbar voltages are identical. If
a class C or higher alarm occurs, this discrete will disable and the GCB will open immediately.
Command: open GCB {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} fixed to relay [R7], terminals 80/81
The parameter 3403 on page 149 defines how this relay functions. If this parameter 3403 is configured
as "N.O.", the relay contacts close resulting in the GCB opening circuit energizing. If this output is
configured as "N.C.", the relay contacts open resulting in the GCB opening circuit de-energizing. If the
controller is configured for the breaker application "None", this relay is freely configurable.
{1o}: The open GCB command remains enabled until the GCB is manually closed and the discrete
input "Reply GCB" is energized. The open GCB command will be issued when a fault condition or an
engine shut down occurs.
{1oc} or {2oc): The controller enables the open GCB command when the GCB is to be opened for
switching operations. If the discrete input "Reply GCB" is energized, the open GCB command will be
disabled.
Auxiliary services {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured to relay [R10], terminals 86/87
The auxiliary services output (LogicsManager 03.01) will be enabled with the start command (prior to
the engine start because of the prerun time) and remains enabled as long as the engine is running. It will
be disabled after the engine has stopped and the postrun time has expired (i.e. for operating a cooling
pump). Refer to Figure 3-24 on page 186 for this behavior.
The auxiliary services output (LogicsManager 03.01) is always enabled in MANUAL operation mode.
Shutdown alarm {0}, {1o}, {1oc}, or {2oc} programmable, pre-configured to relay [R11], terminals 88/89
This discrete output is enabled when a shutdown alarm (class C or higher alarm; refer to Alarm Classes
on page 269 for more information) is issued. After all shutdown alarms have been acknowledged, this
discrete output will disable.
Chapter 3.
Parameters
All parameters are assigned a unique Parameter Identification Number. The Parameter Identification Number
may be used to reference individual parameters listed in this manual. This Parameter Identification Number is
also displayed in the ToolKit configuration screens next to the respective parameter.
Caption
Brief description of the parameter.
Setting range
Permissible limits valid for this parameter.
Text German
DE
Explanations
Detailed parameter description, settings, and the
effects on the controller.
Validity
{0}: Valid for the basic-mode [None]
{1o}: Valid for the 0-CB-mode [GCB open]
{1oc}: Valid for the 1-CB-mode [GCB]
{2oc}: Valid for the 2-CB-mode [GCB/MCB]
{all}: Valid for all application modes
Parameter Display
[CLx] = Visible in code level x or higher
[p] = Parameter Identification Number
[T] = Only displayed in ToolKit for configuration
Language
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The desired language for the unit display text is configured here.
1700
NOTE
If an Asian language is configured, some parameter screens may be displayed with an empty space at
the bottom of the parameter list, which may be interpreted as an end of the list, although more
parameters exist and are displayed when scrolling down.
Stunden
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The hour of the clock time is set here. Example:
1710
0 ....................0th hour of the day (midnight).
23 ..................23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
Minuten
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The minute of the clock time is set here. Example:
1709 0 ....................0th minute of the hour.
59 ..................59th minute of the hour.
EN
Sekunden
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The second of the clock time is set here. Example:
1708 0.................... 0th second of the minute.
59.................. 59th second of the minute.
Tag
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The day of the date is set here. Example:
1711 1.................... 1st day of the month.
31.................. 31st day of the month.
Monat
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The month of the date is set here. Example:
1712 1.................... 1st month of the year.
12.................. 12th month of the year.
Jahr
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The year of the date is set here. Example:
1713 0.................... Year 2000.
99.................. Year 2099.
The daylight saving time feature enables to automatically adjust the real-time clock to local daylight saving time
(DST) provisions. If daylight saving time is enabled, the real-time clock will automatically be advanced by one
hour when the configured DST begin date and time is reached and falls back again by one hour when the
configured DST end date and time is reached. If the unit is used in the southern hemisphere, the DST function
will be inverted automatically, if the DST begin month is later in the year than the DST end month.
NOTE
Do not change the time manually during the hour of the automatic time change if DST is enabled to
avoid a wrong time setting.
Events or alarms, which occur during this hour might have a wrong time stamp.
Daylight saving time Adjust clock: Enable daylight saving time On / Off
EN
Sommerzeitumschaltung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Daylight saving time is enabled.
4591 Off ................ Daylight saving time is disabled.
NOTE
The following parameters will only be displayed, if Daylight saving time (parameter 4591) has been
configured to On and the enter button has been pressed.
Sommerzeitbeginn Uhrzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The real-time clock will be advanced by one hour when this time is reached on the
4594 DST begin date. Example:
0.................... 0th hour of the day (midnight).
23.................. 23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
EN
DST begin weekday Adjust clock: DST begin weekday weekday
Sommerzeitbeginn Wochentag
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The weekday for the DST begin date is configured here
4598
DST begin nth. weekday Adjust clock: DST begin nth weekday weekday order no.
EN
Sommerzeitbeginn x. Wochentag
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The order number of the weekday for the DST begin date is configured here.
4592 Example:
1st .................DST starts on the 1st configured weekday of the DST begin month.
2nd................DST starts on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
3rd ................DST starts on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
4th ................DST starts on the 4th configured weekday of the DST begin month.
Last...............DST starts on the last configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButOne .DST starts on the last but one configured weekday of the DST
begin month.
LastButTwo .DST starts on the last but two configured weekday of the DST
begin month.
LastButThree . DST starts on the last but three configured weekday of the DST
begin month.
Sommerzeitbeginn Monat
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The month for the DST begin date is configured here. Example:
4593 1 ....................1st month of the year.
12 ..................12th month of the year.
Sommerzeitende Uhrzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The real-time clock will fall back by one hour when this time is reached on the
4597 DST end date. Example:
0 ....................0th hour of the day (midnight).
23 ..................23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
Sommerzeitende Wochentag
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The weekday for the DST end date is configured here
4599
DST end nth. weekday Adjust clock: DST end nth weekday weekday order no.
EN
Sommerzeitende x. Wochentag
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The order number of the weekday for the DST end date is configured here.
4595 Example:
1st .................DST ends on the 1st configured weekday of the DST end month.
2nd................DST ends on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST end month.
3rd ................DST ends on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST end month.
4th ................DST ends on the 4th configured weekday of the DST end month.
Last...............DST ends on the last configured weekday of the DST end month.
LastButOne .DST ends on the last but one configured weekday of the DST end
month.
LastButTwo .DST ends on the last but two configured weekday of the DST end
month.
LastButThree . DST ends on the last but three configured weekday of the DST
end month.
EN
Sommerzeitende Monat
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The month for the DST end date is configured here. Example:
4596 1.................... 1st month of the year.
12.................. 12th month of the year.
Example: If daylight saving time starts at 2:00 am on the 2nd Sunday in March and ends at 2:00 am on the 1st
Sunday in November, the unit has to be configured like shown in Table 3-2 to enable an automatic change to
daylight saving time and back to standard time.
ID Parameter Setting
4591 Daylight saving time On
4594 DST begin time 2
4598 DST begin weekday Sunday
4592 DST begin nth weekday 2nd
4593 DST begin month 3
4597 DST end time 2
4599 DST end weekday Sunday
4595 DST end sunday 1st
4596 DST end month 11
Table 3-2: Daylight saving time - configuration example
Configure Display
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The contrast and the brightness of the display may be adjusted using this screen.
Lamp Test
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
All lights on the controller may be tested for correct operation with this function.
Enter Password
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The easYgen-2000 Series utilizes a password protected multi-level configuration access hierarchy. This permits
varying degrees of access to the parameters being granted by assigning unique passwords to designated
personnel. A distinction is made between the access levels as follows:
NOTE
Once the code level is entered, access to the configuration menus will be permitted for two hours or
until another password is entered into the control. If a user needs to exit a code level then code level,
CL0 should be entered. This will block unauthorized configuration of the control. A user may return to
CL0 by allowing the entered password to expire after two hours or by changing any one digit on the
random number generated on the password screen and entering it into the unit.
It is possible to disable expiration of the password by entering "0000" after the CL1 or CL3 password
has been entered. Access to the entered code level will remain enabled until another password is
entered. Otherwise, the code level would expire when loading the standard values (default 0000) via
ToolKit.
Figure 3-1 shows a configuration menu screen in code level CL0 (left) and CL1 (right).
Passwort Display
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for configuring the control via the front panel must be entered here.
10400
Code level display Password system: Code level via display Info
EN
Codeebene Display
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via the
10405
front panel display.
Password for CAN interface 1 Password: Entry via CAN interface #1 0000 to 9999
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for configuring the control via the CAN interface #1 must be
10402
entered here.
Code level CAN interface 1 Password system: Code level via CAN interface #1 Info
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via the
10407
CAN interface #1s.
Password for CAN interface 2 Password: Entry via CAN interface #2 0000 to 9999
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for configuring the control via the CAN interface #1 must be
10432
entered here.
Code level CAN interface 2 Password system: Code level via CAN interface #2 Info
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via the
10422 CAN interface #1s.
Password for serial interface1 Password: Entry via serial interface #1 0000 to 9999
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for configuring the control via the serial interface #1 must be
10401
entered here.
Code level serial interface 1 Password system: Code level via serial RS-232 interface #1 Info
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via RS-
10406 232 serial interface #1.
Password for serial interface2 Password: Entry via serial interface 2 0000 to 9999
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for configuring the control via the serial interface #2 must be
10430
entered here.
Code level serial interface 2 Password system: Code level via serial RS-485 interface #2 Info
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via RS-
10420 485 serial interface #2.
System Management
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Parameter Table Level Text Setting range Default value
System managment
Device number 1 to 32 1
Configure display backlight On / Key activate. Key activate.
Time until backlight shutdown 1 to 999 min 120 min
Factory default settings Yes / No No
Reset factory default values Yes / No No
Start Bootloader 23130 to 23130 42405
Clear eventlog Yes / No No
Table 3-5: Configuration - standard values - system management
Gerätenummer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A unique address is assigned to the control though this parameter. This unique
1702 address permits the controller to be correctly identified on the CAN bus. The
address assigned to the controller may only be used once. All other bus addresses
are calculated on the number entered in this parameter. The device number is also
important for the device assignment in load sharing and load-depnedent start/stop.
NOTE
The unit must be restarted after changing the device number to ensure proper operation.
Configure display backlight System parameter: Configure display backlight On / Off / AUTO / Key activat.
EN
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................The display backlight is always enabled.
4556 Off ................The display backlight is always disabled.
AUTO...........The display backlight is automatically switched off to save battery
energy, if no mains/busbar voltage is available.
Key activat. ..The display backlight will be dimmed, if no soft key is pressed for
the time configured in parameter 4557.
Time until backlight shutdown System parameter: Time until backlight shutdown 1 to 999 min
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective, if parameter 4556 is configured to "Key
4557 activat.".
If no soft key has been pressed for the time configured here, the display backlight
will be dimmed.
Werkseinstellung
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The following three parameters are visible and restoring the
1703 configured parameters to factory default values is enabled.
No .................The following three parameters are invisible and restoring the
configured parameters to factory default values is not enabled.
NOTE
The following parameters will only be displayed, if Factory Settings (parameter 1703) has been
configured to Yes and the enter button has been pressed.
Reset factory default values Factory settings: Set default values Yes / No
EN
DE Standardwerte
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... All parameters, which the enabled access code grants priveleges to,
1701 will be restored to factory default values.
No ................. All parameters will remain as currently configured.
Bootloader starten
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The bootloader is utilized for uploading application software only. The proper
10500 enable code must be entered while the control is in access code level CL3 or higher
to perform this function.
Attention: This function is used for uploading application software and may only
be used by authorized Woodward technicians!
Ereignisspeicher löschen
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The event history will be cleared.
1706 No ................. The event history will not be cleared.
NOTE
The following passwords grant varying levels of access to the parameters. Each individual password
can be used to access the appropriate configuration level through multiple access methods and
communication protocols (via the front panel, via serial RS-232/485 interface, and via the CAN bus).
Basic code level Password system: Password "Service Level" (CL1) 0000 to 9999
EN
Code Serviceebene
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for the code level "Service" is defined in this parameter. Refer to
10415 the Enter Password section on page 30 for default values.
Commissioning code level Password system: Password "Commission" (CL3) 0000 to 9999
EN
CL3 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for the code level "Commission" is defined in this parameter.
10413 Refer to the Enter Password section on page 30 for default values.
Temp. commissioning code level Password system: Password "Temporary Commission" (CL2) 0000 to 9999
EN
CL3 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level "Temporary
10414 Commissioning" is defined in this parameter.
Temp. supercomm. level code Password system: Password "Temporary Supercommissioning" (CL4) 0000 to 9999
EN
CL5 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level "Temporary
10412 Supercommissioning" is defined in this parameter.
Supercommissioning level code Password system: Password "Supercommissioning" (CL5) 0000 to 9999
EN
CL5 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The password for the code level "Supercommissioning" is defined in this
10411 parameter. Refer to the Enter Password section on page 30 for default values.
Configuration
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The configuration screen is accessed pressing the Configuration softkey on the Parameter screen. The following
sub-menus are available to configure the unit:
• Configure Measurement
• Configure Monitoring
• Configure Application
• Configure Interfaces
• Configure LogicsManager
• Configure Counters
NOTE
This controller is available in two different hardware version with either 1A [../1] or 5A [../5] current
transformer inputs. Both versions are discussed in this manual. The set points for specific parameters
will differ depending upon the hardware version.
NOTE
It is absolutely essential that correct rated values to be entered when configuring the controller, as
many measurement and monitoring functions refer to these values.
Configure Measurement
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Parameter Table Level Text Setting range Default value
Configure measurement
Show mains data Yes / No Yes
Generator type Synchron / Asynchron Synchron
System rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz 50 Hz
Engine rated speed 500 to 4000 rpm 1500 rpm
Generator rated voltage 50 to 650000 V 400 V
Mains rated voltage 50 to 650000 V 400 V
Busbar 1 rated voltage 50 to 650000 V 400 V
Gen. rated active power [kW] 0.5 to 99999.9 kW 200 kW
Gen. rated react. power [kvar] 0.5 to 99999.9 kvar 200 kvar
Generator rated current 1 to 32000 A 300 A
Mains rated active power [kW] 0.5 to 99999.9 kW 200 kW
Mains rated react. pwr. [kvar] 0.5 to 99999.9 kvar 200 kvar
Mains rated current 5 to 32000 A 300 A
1Ph2W voltage measuring Phase - phase / Phase - neutral Phase – phase
1Ph2W phase rotation CW /CCW CW
Generator voltage measuring 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 3W / 3Ph 4W
1Ph 2W / 1Ph 3W
Generator current measuring L1 L2 L3 / Phase L1 / L1 L2 L3
Phase L2 / Phase L3
Mains voltage measuring 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 3W / 3Ph 4W
1Ph 2W / 1Ph 3W
Mains current input Mains current / Ground current / Mains current
Off
Mains current measuring Phase L1 / Phase L2 / Phase L3 Phase L1
Table 3-7: Measurement - standard values - configure measurement
NOTE
If the easYgen is intended to be operated in parallel with the mains, the mains voltage measuring
inputs must be connected. If an external mains decoupling is performed, jumpers between busbar and
mains voltage measuring inputs may be installed.
EN
Generatortyp
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The easYgen supports two types of generators:
235
• synchron generators
• asynchron generators (induction generators)
Synchron: The unit provides all functions which are needed for synchron
generator applications. Isolated and mains parallel operation is supported.
Asynchron: The unit provides the special function of the asynchronos generator
with:
• The speed is regulated with the speed signal from the MPU or
J1939/CAN input (as long as the GCB is open).
• The closing of the GCB is executed, if the speed is within the
corresponding frequency range of the generator operating window. The
voltage and phase angle is ignored in this case.
• The generator monitoring (under/over frequency and under/overvoltage)
is switched off, until the generator breaker is closed.
• After opening the GCB, under/over frequency and under/overvoltage
monitoring is switched off again.
• The Frequency/MPU speed plausibility monitoring is only active, if the
GCB is closed.
• The synchronoscope is not displayed in the asynchron modus.
Nennfrequenz im System
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The rated frequency of the system is used as a reference figure for all frequency
1750 related functions, which use a percentage value, like frequency monitoring,
breaker operation windows or the Analog Manager.
Nenndrehzahl
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Number of revolutions per minute of the engine at rated engine speed. The speed
1601 control with an ECU via J1939 CAN bus refers to this value.
EN
Generator rated voltage Generator rated voltage 50 to 650000 V
Nennspannung Generator
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the rated voltage of the generator (generator voltage
1766 on data plate) and is the voltage measured on the potential transformer
primary.
Nennspannung Netz
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the rated voltage of the mains and is the voltage
1768 --- --- --- measured on the potential transformer primary.
The mains potential transformer primary voltage is entered in this parameter. The
mains rated voltage is used as a reference figure for all mains voltage related
functions, which use a percentage value, like mains voltage monitoring, breaker
operation windows or the Analog Manager.
Sammelschiene 1 Nennspannung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the rated voltage of busbar 1 and is the voltage
1781 measured on the potential transformer primary.
If voltage measuring is configured to 1Ph 3W, the WYE voltage (VL1N)
must be entered here.
Gen. rated active power [kW] Generator rated active power 0.5 to 99999.9 kW
EN
Nennwirkleistung [kW]
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the generator real power rating, which is used as a reference
1752 figure for related functions. The generator rated active power is the generator
apparent power multiplied by the generator power factor (typically ~0.8). These
values are indicated in the generator data plate. Refer to Figure 3-3 for more
information.
Gen. rated react. power [kvar] Generator rated reactive power 0.5 to 99999.9 kvar
EN
Nennblindleistung [kvar]
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the generator reactive power rating, which is used as a
1758 reference figure for related functions. The generator rated reactive power also
depends on the generator values. Refer to Figure 3-3 for more information.
Nennstrom Generator
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the generator rated current, which is used as a reference figure
1754 for related functions.
Mains rated active power [kW] Mains rated active power 0.5 to 99999.9 kW
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the mains real power rating, which is used as a reference
1748 figure for related functions. The mains rated active power is a reference value used
by several monitoring and control functions. Refer to Figure 3-3 for more
information.
Mains rated react. pwr. [kvar] Mains rated reactive power 0.5 to 99999.9 kvar
EN
Nennblindleistung Netz [kvar]
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the mains reactive power rating, which is used as a reference
1746 figure for related functions. The mains rated reactive power is a reference value
used by several monitoring and control functions. Refer to Figure 3-3 for more
information.
Nennstrom Netz
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value specifies the mains rated current, which is used as a reference figure for
1785
related functions.
Figure 3-3 shows the AC power triangle to illustrate the dependencies between active power, apparent power,
reactive power, and power factor.
PF = Power Factor
P = Active Power = [kW]
S = Apparent power [kVA]
Q = Reactive Power [kvar]
P
PF = = cos ϕ
S
Q = S 2 − P2
S = P2 + Q2
P = S * PF
Figure 3-3: AC power triangle
1Ph2W voltage measuring Measurement principle: 1Ph 2W measuring Phase - phase / Phase - neutral
EN
CL3 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1858 manual (37426).
Phase - phase The unit is configured for measuring phase-phase voltages if 1Ph
2W measuring is selected.
Phase - neutral The unit is configured for measuring phase-neutral voltages if 1Ph
2W measuring is selected.
NOTE
Do never configure the busbar measurement for phase-neutral, if the other systems like mains and
generator are configured as 3Ph 3W or 4Ph 4W. The phase angle for synchronisation would be not
correct.
CL3 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1859 manual (37426).
EN
Generator voltage measuring Measurement principle: Generator 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 3W / 1Ph 2W / 1Ph 3W
Gen.Spannungsmessung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1851 manual (37426).
Gen.Strommessung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1850 manual (37426). This parameter is only effective if generator voltage
measuring (parameter 1851) is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
Mains voltage measuring Measurement principle: Mains 3Ph 4W / 3Ph 3W / 1Ph 2W / 1Ph 3W
EN
Netz.Spannungsmessung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1853 --- --- --- manual (37426).
Mains current input Measurement principle: Mains current input Off / Mains current / Ground current
EN
Eingang Netzstrom
DE
Netz.Strommessung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please refer to the comments on measuring principles in the installation
1852 --- --- --- manual (37426). This parameter is only effective if mains voltage
measuring (parameter 1853) is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
Phase L{1/2/3} Measurement is performed for the selected phase only. The
measurement and display refer to the selected phase. The configured
phase CT must be connected to perform current measurement.
Generator
Gen. PT primary rated voltage Generator potential transformer primary voltage rating 50 to 650000 V
EN
Gen.Spg.Wandler primär
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Some generator applications may require the use of potential transformers to
1801 facilitate measuring the voltages produced by the generator. The rating of the
primary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the generator application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the
generated voltage is 480 V or less), then the generated voltage will be entered into
this parameter.
Gen. PT secondary rated volt. Generator potential transformer secondary voltage rating 50 to 480 V
EN
Gen.Spg.Wandler sekundär
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring inputs. The voltage
1800 range of these measurement inputs is dependent upon input terminals are
used (see below). This value refers to the secondary voltages of the
potential transformers, which are directly connected to the control.
• Rated voltage: 100 Vac (this parameter configured between 50 and 130 V)
- Generator voltage: Terminals 14/16/18/20
• Rated voltage: 400 Vac (this parameter configured between 131 and 480 V)
- Generator voltage: Terminals 15/17/19/21
! WARNING:
Only connect the measured voltage to either the 100 Vac or the 400 Vac
inputs. Do not connect both sets of inputs to the measured system.
NOTE
This controller is available in two different hardware version with either 1A [../1] or 5A [../5] current
transformer inputs. Both versions are discussed in this manual. The set points for specific parameters
will differ depending upon the hardware version, indicated on the data plate.
• [1] easYgen-2xxx-1 = Current transformer with ../1 A rated current
• [5] easYgen-2xxx-5 = Current transformer with ../5 A rated current
Gen. CT primary rated current Generator current transformer primary rating 1 to 32000/5 A
EN
Generator Stromwandler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This screen only applies to controls equipped with 5 A CT inputs. This will
1806 not be displayed in the controller screen of a unit equipped with 1 A CT
inputs.
The input of the current transformer ratio is necessary for the indication and
control of the actual monitored value. The current transformers ratio should be
selected so that at least 60% of the secondary current rating can be measured when
the monitored system is at 100% of operating capacity (i.e. at 100% of system
capacity a 5 A CT should output 3 A). If the current transformers are sized so that
the percentage of the output is lower, the loss of resolution may cause inaccuracies
in the monitoring and control functions and affect the functionality of the control.
Busbar
Busb1 PT primary rated voltage Busbar 1 potential transformer primary voltage rating 50 to 650000 V
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
1813
measuring the voltages to be monitored. The rating of the primary side of the
potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
voltage is 480 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
Busb1 PT secondary rated volt. Busbar 1 potential transformer secondary voltage rating 50 to 480 V
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring inputs. The voltage
1812 range of these measurement inputs is dependent upon input terminals are
used (see below). This value refers to the secondary voltages of the
potential transformers, which are directly connected to the control.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
voltage is 480 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
• Rated voltage: 120 Vac (this parameter configured between 50 and 130 V)
- Busbar voltage: Terminals 22/24/26/28
• Rated voltage: 480 Vac (this parameter configured between 131 and 480 V)
- Busbar voltage: Terminals 23/25/27/29
! WARNING:
Only connect the measured voltage to either the 100 Vac or the 400 Vac
inputs. Do not connect both sets of inputs to the measured system.
Mains PT
Mains PT primary rated voltage Mains potential transformer primary voltage rating 50 to 650000 V
EN
Netz.Spg.Wandler primär
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
1804 --- --- ---
measuring the voltages to be monitored. The rating of the primary side of the
potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
voltage is 480 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
Mains PT secondary rated volt. Mains potential transformer secondary voltage rating 50 to 480 V
EN
Netz.Spg.Wandler sekundär
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control is equipped with dual voltage measuring inputs. The voltage
1803 --- --- --- range of these measurement inputs is dependent upon input terminals are
used (see below). This value refers to the secondary voltages of the
potential transformers, which are directly connected to the control.
If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
voltage is 480 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
• Rated voltage: 120 Vac (this parameter configured between 50 and 130 V)
- Mains voltage: Terminals 22/24/26/28
• Rated voltage: 480 Vac (this parameter configured between 131 and 480 V)
- Mains Voltage: Terminals 23/25/27/29
! WARNING:
Only connect the measured voltage to either the 100 Vac or the 400 Vac
inputs. Do not connect both sets of inputs to the measured system.
Netz Stromwandler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This screen only applies to controls equipped with 5 A CT inputs. This
1807 --- --- --- will not be displayed in the controller screen of a unit equipped with 1 A
CT inputs.
Erd-Stromwandler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This screen only applies to controls equipped with 5 A CT inputs. This
1810 will not be displayed in the controller screen of a unit equipped with 1 A
CT inputs.
Configure Monitoring
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Configure Monitoring: Generator
Generator voltage monitoring Generator protection: type of monitoring Phase - phase / Phase - neutral
EN
Gen. Spannungsüberwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit can either monitor the phase-neutral (wye) voltages or the phase-phase
1770 (delta) voltages. If the controller is used in a compensated or isolated network,
voltage protection monitoring should be configured as phase-neutral to prevent
earth-faults resulting in tripping of the voltage protections.
! WARNING:
This parameter defines how the protective functions operate.
Phase - phase The phase-phase voltage will be measured and all subsequent
parameters concerning voltage monitoring "generator" are referred to
this value (VL-L).
Phase - neutral The phase-neutral voltage will be measured and all subsequent
parameters concerning voltage monitoring "generator" are referred to
this value (VL-N).
Upper voltage limit Generator maximum operating voltage limit 100 to 150 %
EN
Obere Spannungsabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible positive deviation of the generator voltage from the
5800 generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on page 38) is configured here. This value
may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be
used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.03).
Untere Spannungsabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible negative deviation of the generator voltage from the
5801 generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on page 38) is configured here. This value
may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be
used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.03).
Upper frequency limit Generator maximum operating frequency limit 100.0 to 150.0 %
EN
Obere Frequenzabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible positive deviation of the generator frequency from the
5802 rated system frequency (parameter 1750 on page 37) is configured here. This value
may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may
be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.04).
Lower frequency limit Generator minimum operating frequency limit 50.0 to 100.0 %
EN
Untere Frequenzabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible negative deviation of the generator frequency from the
5803 rated system frequency (parameter 1750 on page 37) is configured here. This value
may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may
be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.04).
NOTE
The operating voltage/frequency parameters are used to check if the values are in range when
performing a dead bus closure and synchronization of the generator. Busbar must be within this
ranges to synchronize the generator to the busbar.
It is recommended to configure the operating limits within the monitoring limits.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following
1900 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
1906
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
limit < limit 2).
Off ............... Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the System rated frequency (parameter 1750 on
1904 page 37).
1910
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator frequency value exceeds the threshold value for the
1905 delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator
1911
frequency falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires
the time will be reset.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
1901
1907
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
1902 no longer detected.
1908
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. overfrequency Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
1903 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
1909
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Underfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the
1950 following parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both
1956
values may be configured independent from each
other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).
Off ............... Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the System rated frequency (parameter 1750 on
1954 page 37).
1960
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator frequency value falls below the threshold value for the
1955 delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator
1961
frequency exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay
expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. underfrequency: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
1951
1957
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
1952 no longer detected.
1958
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. underfrequency Engine delayed monitoring (Limit 1/Limit 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
1953 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
1959
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
This monitoring function is disabled when the idle mode (see page 187) is active.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overvoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following
2000 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2006
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
limit < Level 2 limit).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on
2004 page 38).
2010
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator voltage exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2005 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator voltage falls
2011
below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will
be reset.
Alarm class Gen. overvoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2001
2007
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2002 no longer detected.
2008
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. overvoltage: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2003 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2009
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Undervoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following
2050 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values
2056
may be configured independent from each other (prerequisite:
Level 1 limit < Level 2 limit).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on
2054 page 38).
2060
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are
defined here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time
without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay
2055 time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator voltage
2061
exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay expires the time
will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. undervoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2051
2057
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2052 no longer detected.
2058
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. undervoltage: Delayed engine speed (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2053 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2059
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
This monitoring function is disabled when the idle mode (see page 187) is active.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-36 on page 321 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overcurrent monitoring is carried out according to the following
2200 parameters. Monitoring is performed at three levels. All three values
2206
2212 may be configured independent from each other (prerequisite:
Level 1 < Level 2 < Level 3).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit, Level 2 limit, and/or Level 3
limit.
Limit Gen. overcurrent, TOC: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2/Level 3) 50.0 to 300.0 %
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated current (parameter 1754 on
2204 page 38).
2210
2216
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Delay Gen. overcurrent, TOC: Delay (Level 1/Level 2/Level 3) 0.02 to 99.99 s
EN
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator current exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2205 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator current falls
2211
2217 below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be
reset.
Alarm class Gen. overcurrent, TOC: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2/Level 3) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2201
2207
2213 Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. overcurrent, TOC: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2/Level 3) On / Off
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2202 longer detected.
2208
2214 No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-39 on page 324 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
NOTE
Definition
• Reduced power
Fault initiated if the monitored real power falls below the configured (positive) limit.
• Reverse power
Fault initiated if the direction of the monitored real power reverses and the configured (negative)
limit is exceeded.
The values for reverse /reduced power monitoring can be configured as follows:
• Level 1 limit = Positive and
Level 2 limit = Positive (whereas Level 1 limit > Level 2 limit > 0 %):
Both limits are configured for reduced power monitoring.
(example: rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = 5 % > Level 2 limit = 3 %; tripping if real power falls
below
5 kW (Level 1 limit) or 3 kW (Level 2 limit))
• Level 1 limit = Negative and
Level 2 limit = Negative (whereas Level 2 limit < Level 1 limit < 0%):
Both limits are configured for reverse power monitoring.
(example: rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = -3 % > Level 2 limit = -5 %; tripping if real power
falls below
-3 kW (Level 1 limit) or -5 kW (Level 2 limit))
• Level 1 limit = Positive and
Level 2 limit = Negative (whereas Level 1 limit > 0 % > Level 2 limit):
Level 1 is configured for reduced power monitoring and
Level 2 is configured for reverse power monitoring.
(example: rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = 3 % > Level 2 limit = -5 %; tripping if real power
falls below
3 kW (Level 1 limit) or -5 kW (Level 2 limit))
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. Reverse/reduced power monitoring is carried out according to the
2250 following parameters. Both values may be configured independent
2256
from each other (prerequisite for {1oc}, {2oc}: GCB must be
closed).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Limit Gen. reverse/reduced power: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) -99.9 to 99.9 %
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated active power (parameter 1752 on
2254 page 38).
2260
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator power falls below the threshold value for the delay
2255 time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator power
2261
exceeds or falls below the threshold (plus/minus the hysteresis) again before the
delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. reverse/reduced power: Alarm class (Lim.1/Lim.2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2251
2257
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. reverse/reduced power: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2252 no longer detected.
2258
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. reverse/reduced power: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2253 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2259
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overload monitoring is carried out according to the following
2300 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2306
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
limit < Level 2 limit).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Limit Gen. overload IOP: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) 50.0 to 300.00 %
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated active power (parameter 1752 on
2304 page 38).
2310
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator load exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2305 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator load falls
2311
below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be
reset.
Alarm class Gen. overload IOP: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2301
2307
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.-
Self acknowledge Gen. overload IOP: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2302 longer detected.
2308
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overload monitoring is carried out according to the following
2350 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2356
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
limit < Level 2 limit).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Limit Gen. overload MOP: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) 50.0 to 300.00 %
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated active power (parameter 1752 on
2354 page 38).
2360
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator load exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2355 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator load falls
2361
below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be
reset.
Alarm class Gen. overload MOP: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2351
2357
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. overload MOP: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2352 longer detected.
2358
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-40 on page 325 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled when Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is
configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and Generator current measuring (parameter 1850) is configured
to "L1 L2 L3".
Parameters
EN
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Unbalanced load monitoring is carried out according to the
2400
2406
following parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both
values may be configured independent from each other (condition:
Level 1 < Level 2).
Off ................ No monitoring is carried out for either Level 1 limit or Level 2
limit.
Limit Gen. unbalanced load: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) 0.0 to 100.0 %
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated current (parameter 1754 on
2404 page 38).
2410
The percentage value that is to be monitored is defined here. If the current in one
phase differs from the average value of all three phases by more than this value for
at least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class
is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored current exceeds the average value of all three phases by more
2405 than the threshold value for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be
2411
issued. If the monitored current falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. unbalanced load: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2401
2407
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. unbalanced load: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2402 no longer detected.
2408
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. unbalanced load: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2403 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2409
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-41 on page 326 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured
to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Voltage asymmetry monitoring is carried out according to the
3900 following parameters.
Off ............... No monitoring is carried out.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to Generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on page 38).
3903
The percentage value that is to be monitored is defined here. If the voltage in one
phase differs from the average value of all three phases by more than this value for
at least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class
is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator voltage asymmetry exceeds the threshold value for the
3904 delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored generator
voltage asymmetry falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the
delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3901
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3902 no longer detected.
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. voltage asymmetry: Engine delayed monitoring Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3905 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
The current produced by the generator is monitored depending on how parameter "Generator current measuring"
(parameter 1850 on page 40) is configured. The measured three conductor currents IGen-L1, IGen-L2 and IGen-L3 are
vectorially totaled (IS = IGen-L1 + IGen-L2 + IGen-L3) and compared with the configured fault limit (the calculated
actual value is indicated in the display). If the measured value exceeds the fault threshold limit, a ground fault is
present, and an alarm is issued.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Ground fault 1" or "Ground fault 2" and
the logical command variable "06.19" or "06.20" will be enabled.
NOTE
The ground fault protection zone is determined by the location where the generator current transformer
are physically installed.
L1
L2 G
3~
L3
IN=0 R
N
Test: Short-circuit one of the three generator current transformers while the generator is at full load. The
measured current should read 100% of rated on the two phases that do not have their current transformers short-
circuited.
The ground current calculation does not take current on the neutral conductor into consideration. In order for the
controller to be able to perform calculated ground fault current protection accurately, the neutral conductor must
not conduct current.
The fault threshold value is configured as a percentage. This percentage threshold refers to the generator rated
current (parameter 1754). Due to unavoidable load asymmetries, the minimum value for this parameter should be
10% or greater.
Calculation
a) b)
IL1 c)
IL1
Y Y Y
IL3' IL3'
IL1' IL1'
IL3' IL1' IS IL2' IS
X X X
IL3X IL3X
IL3Y IL2Y
IL2 IL2' IL3Y IL2Y
IL2 IL2
IL3 IL2X IL3 IL2X
a) No ground fault b) Ground fault (with vectorial calculation) c) Ground fault (IS = ground fault current)
Figure 3-5: Monitoring - calculated generator ground current - vector diagram
The ground current IS is calculated geometrically/vectorially. The pointers for phase currents IL1 and IL2 are
parallel shifted and lined up as shown in Figure 3-5 a). The pointer between the neutral point and the point of the
shifted pointer IL2' results is the sum current IS as shown in Figure 3-5 b). In order to be able to add the pointers
vectorially, these must be divided into their X- and Y-coordinates (IL2X, IL2Y, IL3X and IL3Y). The ground fault
current may be calculated using the following formula:
Ground fault current is actively measured when the mains current input is configured to monitor for ground
current. The ground fault threshold is configured as a percentage of the value entered for parameter "Ground
current transformer" (parameters 1810 or Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden. on page 46).
NOTE
The ground fault protection zone is determined by the physical installation location of the generator
current transformer.
Parameter
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. Ground current monitoring is carried out according to the following
3250
3256
parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
< Level 2).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Generator rated current of the generator
3254 (parameter 1754 on page 38), if the ground current is calculated from the
3260
generator current values. It refers to the parameter "Ground current
transformer" (parameters 1810 or Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht
gefunden werden. on page 46), if the ground current is measured directly.
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
NOTE
The ground fault threshold shall not exceed the mains/ground current measuring range (approx. 1.5 ×
Irated; refer to the Technical Data section of the Installation Manual 37426).
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored ground fault exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
3255 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored ground fault falls below
3261
the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. ground fault: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3251
3257
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. ground fault: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3252 no longer detected.
3258
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. ground fault: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3253 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
3259
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
CAUTION
Ensure that the control unit is properly connected to phase voltages on both sides of the circuit
breaker(s) during installation. Failure to do so may result in damage to the control unit and/or
generation equipment due to the breaker closing asynchronously or with mismatched phase rotations.
Also ensure that phase rotation monitoring is enabled at all connected components (engine, generator,
breakers, cable, busbars, etc.).
This function will block a connection of systems with mismatched phases only under the following
conditions:
• The voltages being measured are wired correctly with respect to the phase rotation at the
measuring points (i.e. the potential transformers in on both sides of the circuit breaker)
• The voltages being measured are wired so that angular phase shifts or any interruptions from the
measuring point to the control unit do not exist
• The voltages being measured are wired to the correct terminals of the control unit (i.e. L1 phase of
the generator is connected with the terminal of the control unit which is intended for the generator
L1 phase)
• The configured alarm class is of class C, D, E, or F (shutdown alarm).
Correct phase rotation of the phase voltages ensures that damage will not occur during a breaker closure to either
the mains or the generator. The voltage phase rotation alarm checks the phase rotation of the measured voltages
and the configured phase rotation to ensure they are identical. The directions of rotation are differentiated as
"clockwise" and "counter clockwise". With a clockwise field the direction of rotation is "L1-L2-L3"; with a
counter clockwise field the direction of rotation is "L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise
rotation and the measured voltages are monitored as counterclockwise, the alarm will be initiated. The direction
of configured rotation being monitored by the control unit is displayed on the screen.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Gen.ph.rot. mismatch" and the logical
command variable "06.21" will be enabled.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured
to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1766)
or if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase
rotation is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
EN
Monitoring Gen.voltage phase rotation: Monitoring On / Off
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the following
3950 parameters.
Off ................ No monitoring is carried out.
Generatordrehfeld
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} CW ............... The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CW (clock-
3954 wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction; standard
setting).
CCW ............ The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CCW
(counter clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L3-L2
direction).
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3951
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen.voltage phase rotation: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3952
no longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen.voltage phase rotation: Engine delayed monitoring Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3953 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
0.14
"Normal inverse" characteristic: t= * t p [s]
( I / I P ) 0.02 − 1
13.5
"Highly inverse" characteristic: t= * t p [s]
(I / I P ) −1
80
"Extremely inverse" characteristic: t= * t p [s]
(I / I P )2 − 1
NOTE
The maximum tripping time is 327 s. If a tripping time greater than 327 s is configured, an overcurrent
fault condition will not be recognized.
Normal Inverse
Ip = 1 x In; I start = 1.1 x In
t[s]
1000
100
10
tp = 1.6 s
tp = 1.0 s
1 tp = 0.5 s
tp = 0.2 s
tp = 0.1 s
tp = 0.05 s
0.1
I start/Ip
0.01
1 10 I/Ip 100
Highly inverse
Ip = In; I-Start = 1.1 x In
t[s]
1000
100
10
1 tp = 1.6 s
tp = 1.0 s
tp = 0.5 s
tp = 0.2 s
0.1
tp = 0.1 s
tp = 0.05 s
I-Start/Ip
0.01
1 10 I/Ip 100
Extremely inverse
Ip = In; I-Start = 1.1 x In
t[s]
1000
100
10
tp = 1.6 s
tp = 1.0 s
0.1
tp = 0.5 s
tp = 0.2 s
I-Start/Ip
tp = 0.05 s tp = 0.1 s
0.01
1 10 I/Ip 100
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overcurrent monitoring is carried out according to the following
4030 parameters.
Off ................ No monitoring is carried out.
Inverse time characteristic Gen. overcurrent, inverse: Tripping characteristic Normal / High / Extreme
EN
Überstrom Charakteristik
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Selection of the used overcurrent characteristic.
4034
Normal......... The "normal inverse" tripping curve will be used
High ............. The "highly inverse" tripping curve will be used
Extreme ....... The "extremely inverse" tripping curve will be used.
Inverse time overcurrent Tp= Gen. overcurrent, inverse: Time constant Tp 0.01 to 1.99 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Time constant Tp used to calculate the characteristics.
4035
Inverse time overcurr. Ip= Gen. overcurrent, inverse: Current constant Ip 10.0 to 300.0 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Current constant Ip used to calculate the characteristics.
4036
Inv time overcurr. I-start= Gen. overcurrent, inverse: I start 100.0 to 300.0 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Lower tripping value for inverse time-overcurrent protection. If the monitored
4037 current is less than Istart, the inverse time-overcurrent protection does not trip. If Istart
is less than Ip, Ip is used as the lower tripping value.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
4031
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
4032 no longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. overcurrent, inverse: Engine delayed monitoring Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
4033 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Figure 3-9 shows an example of a leading and a lagging power factor limit and the power factor range, for which
the lagging power factor monitoring issues an alarm.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Gen. PF lagging 1" or
"Gen. PF lagging 2" and the logical command variable "06.25" or "06.26" will be enabled.
Power Factor
More lagging than a leading PF limit of -0.4 More lagging than a lagging PF limit of +0.85
-0.4 +0.85
- 0.5 - 0.75 1.00 +0.75 +0.5
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. Generator lagging power factor monitoring is carried out according
2325 to the following parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2331
Both values may be configured independent from each other.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Limit Gen. lagging power factor: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) -0.001 to +0.001
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined here. If the
2329 power factor becomes more lagging (i.e. inductive, refer to Figure 3-9) than a
2335
lagging PF value (positive) or a leading PF value (negative) for at least the delay
time (parameters 2330 or 2336) without interruption, the action specified by the
alarm class is initiated.
Delay Gen. lagging power factor: Delay (Level 1/Level 2) 0.02 to 99.99 s
EN
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator power factor is more lagging than the configured limit
2330 for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored
2336
generator power factor returns within the limit before the delay expires the time
will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. lagging power factor: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2326
2332
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. lagging power factor: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2327 no longer detected.
2333
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. lagging power factor: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2328 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2334
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Figure 3-10 shows an example of a leading and a lagging power factor limit and the power factor range, for
which the leading power factor monitoring issues an alarm.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Gen. PF leading 1" or
"Gen. PF leading 2" and the logical command variable "06.27" or "06.28" will be enabled.
Power Factor
More leading than a leading PF limit of -0.85 More leading than a lagging PF limit of +0.4
-0.85 +0.4
- 0.5 - 0.75 1.00 +0.75 +0.5
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Generator leading power factor monitoring is carried out according
2375 to the following parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2381
Both values may be configured independent from each other.
Off................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Limit Gen. leading power factor: Threshold value (Level 1/Level 2) -0.001 to +0.001
EN
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined here. If
2379 the power factor becomes more leading (i.e. capacitive, refer to Figure 3-10) than
2385
a leading PF value (negative) or a lagging PF value (positive) for at least the
delay time (parameters 2380 or 2386) without interruption, the action specified
by the alarm class is initiated.
Delay Gen. leading power factor: Delay (Level 1/Level 2) 0.02 to 99.99 s
EN
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator power factor is more leading than the configured limit
2380 for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored
2386
generator power factor returns within the limit before the delay expires the time
will be reset.
Alarm class Gen. leading power factor: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2376
2382
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Gen. leading power factor: Self acknowledgment (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2377 no longer detected.
2383
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Gen. leading power factor: Delayed engine speed (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2378 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2384
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Mains voltage monitoring Mains protection: Type of monitoring Phase - phase / Phase - neutral
EN
Netz Spannungsüberwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit can either monitor the wye voltages (phase-neutral) or the delta voltages
1771 (phase-phase). The monitoring of the wye voltage is above all necessary to avoid
earth-faults in a compensated or isolated network resulting in the tripping of the
voltage protection.
! WARNING:
This parameter influences the protective functions.
Phase - phase The phase-phase voltage will be measured and all subsequent
parameters concerning voltage monitoring "mains" are referred to
this value (VL-L).
Phase - neutral The phase-neutral voltage will be measured and all subsequent
parameters concerning voltage monitoring "mains" are referred to
this value (VL-N).
Mains settling time Breaker: Mains failure: Mains settling time 0 to 9999 s
EN
Netzberuhigungszeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} To end the emergency operation, the monitored mains must be within the
2801 configured operating parameters without interruption for the minimum period of
time set with this parameter without interruption. This parameter permits delaying
the switching of the load from the generator to the mains. The display indicates
"Mains settling" during this time.
Upper voltage limit Operating voltage window, mains, maximum limit 100 to 150 %
EN
Obere Spannungsabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains voltage from the mains
5810 rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page 38) is configured here. This value may be
used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be used as a
command variable for the LogicsManager (02.09).
Hysteresis upper voltage limit Operating voltage window, mains, maximum limit hysteresis 0 to 50 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the mains voltage has exceeded the limit configured in parameter 5810, the
5814 voltage must fall below the limit and the value configured here, to be considered as
being within the operating limits again.
Lower voltage limit Operating voltage window, mains, minimum limit 50 to 100 %
EN
Untere Spannungsabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains voltage from the mains
5811
rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page 38) is configured here. This value may be
used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be used as a
command variable for the LogicsManager (02.09).
Hysteresis lower voltage limit Operating voltage window, mains, minimum limit hysteresis 0 to 50 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the mains voltage has fallen below the limit configured in parameter 5811, the
5815 voltage must exceed the limit and the value configured here, to be considered as
being within the operating limits again.
Upper frequency limit Operating frequency window, mains, maximum limit 100.0 to 150.0 %
EN
Obere Frequenzabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains frequency from the rated
5812 system frequency (parameter 1750 on page 37) is configured here. This value may
be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may be
used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.10).
Hyst. upper frequency limit Operating frequency window, mains, maximum limit hysteresis 0.0 to 50.0 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the mains frequency has exceeded the limit configured in parameter 5812, the
5816
frequency must fall below the limit and the value configured here, to be considered
as being within the operating limits again.
Lower frequency limit Operating frequency window, mains, minimum limit 50.0 to 100.0 %
EN
Untere Frequenzabw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains frequency from the
5813 rated system frequency (parameter 1750 on page 37) is configured here. This value
may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of this switch may
be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.10).
Hyst. lower frequency limit Operating frequency window, mains, minimum limit hysteresis 0.0 to 50.0 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the mains frequency has fallen below the limit configured in parameter 5813, the
5817 frequency must exceed the limit and the value configured here, to be considered as
being within the operating limits again.
Example:
If the mains rated voltage is 400 V, the upper voltage limit is 110 % (of the mains rated voltage, i.e. 440 V), and
the hysteresis for the upper voltage limit is 5 % (of the mains rated voltage, i.e. 20 V), the mains voltage will be
considered as being out of the operating limits as soon as it exceeds 440 V and will be considered as being within
the operating limits again as soon as it falls below 420 V (440 V – 20 V).
If the rated system frequency is 50 Hz, the lower frequency limit is 90 % (of the rated system frequency, i.e.
45 Hz), and the hysteresis for the lower frequency limit is 5 % (of the rated system frequency, i.e. 2.5 Hz), the
mains frequency will be considered as being out of the operating limits as soon as it falls below 45 Hz and will be
considered as being within the operating limits again as soon as it exceeds 47.5 Hz (45 Hz + 2.5 Hz).
NOTE
The mains operating voltage/frequency parameters are used to trigger mains failure conditions and
activate an emergency run. The mains values must be within this ranges to synchronize the mains
circuit breaker. It is recommended to configure the operating limits within the monitoring limits.
Mains decoupling Mains decoupling: Monitoring GCB / GCB->MCB / MCB / MCB->GCB / Off
EN
Netzentkopplung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} GCB .............Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following
3110 parameters. If one of the subordinate monitoring functions is
triggered, the GCB will be opened. If the unit is operated in parallel
with the mains and the MCB opens, the GCB will be closed again.
GCB->MCB.Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following
parameters. If one of the subordinate monitoring functions is
triggered, the GCB will be opened. If the reply "GCB open" is not
present within the delay configured in parameter 3113, the MCB
will be opened as well.
MCB .............Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following
parameters. If one of the subordinate monitoring functions is
triggered, the MCB will be opened.
MCB->GCB.Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following
parameters. If one of the subordinate monitoring functions is
triggered, the MCB will be opened. If the reply "MCB open" is not
present within the delay configured in parameter 3113, the GCB
will be opened as well.
Off ................Mains decoupling monitoring is disabled.
Mns. decoupling feedback delay Mains decoupling: Feedback delay 0.10 to 5.00 s
EN
Netzentkopplg Rückmeldungszeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the open signal from the respective circuit breaker cannot be detected within
3113 the time configured here, the mains decoupling function performs the action as
configured in parameter 3110.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3111
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3112 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
NOTE
The mains decoupling function is optimized on the both relay outputs "GCB open" and "MCB open". In
case of using a free relay output in conjunction with the command variable 07.25 an additional delay
time of up to 20ms is to consider.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following
2850 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2856
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: limit 1
< Level 2 limit).
Off................ Monitoring is disabled for limit 1 and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the System rated frequency (parameter 1750on
2854 page 37).
2860
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored mains frequency value exceeds the threshold value for the delay
2855 time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored mains frequency
2861
falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time
will be reset.
Alarm class Mains overfrequency: Alarm class (Limit 1/Limit 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2851
2857
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2852 no longer detected.
2858
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains overfrequency: Delayed engine speed (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2853 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2859
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
The mains overfrequency Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the mains
decoupling function menu on the display.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Underfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the
2900 following parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both
2906
values may be configured independent from each
other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).
Off................ Monitoring is disabled for limit 1 and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the System rated frequency (parameter 1750on
2904 page 37).
2910
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored mains frequency value falls below the threshold value for the
2905 delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored mains
2911
frequency exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay
expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Mains underfrequency: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2901
2907
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2902 no longer detected.
2908
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains underfrequency Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2903 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2909
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
The mains underfrequency Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the mains
decoupling function menu on the display.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overvoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following
2950 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2956
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: limit 1
< Level 2 limit).
Off................ Monitoring is disabled for limit 1 and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page 38).
2954
2960
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored mains voltage exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2955 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored mains voltage falls
2961
below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will
be reset.
Alarm class Mains overvoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2951
2957
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2952 no longer detected.
2958
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains overvoltage: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2953 --- delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2959
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
The mains overvoltage Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the mains decoupling
function menu on the display.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Undervoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following
3000 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
3006
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
limit < Level 2 limit).
Off................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the Mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page 38).
3004
3010
The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined
here. If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored mains voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay time
3005 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored mains voltage exceeds
3011
the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay expires the time will be
reset.
Alarm class Mains undervoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3001
3007
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3002 no longer detected.
3008
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains undervoltage: Delayed engine speed (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3003 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
3009
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
The mains undervoltage Level 2 limit configuration parameters are located below the mains decoupling
function menu on the display.
The easYgen measures the duration of a cycle, where a new measurement is started with each voltage passing
through zero. The measured cycle duration will be compared with an internal quartz-calibrated reference time to
determine the cycle duration difference of the voltage signal. A vector/phase shift as shown in Figure 3-11 causes
a premature or delayed zero passage. The determined cycle duration difference corresponds with the occurring
phase shift angle.
The monitoring may be carried out three-phased or one/three-phased. Different limits may be configured for one-
phase and three-phase monitoring. The vector/phase shift monitor can also be used as an additional method to
decouple from the mains. Vector/phase shift monitoring is only enabled after the monitored voltage exceeds 50%
of the PT secondary rated voltage.
Function: "Voltage cycle duration not within the permissible range" - The voltage cycle duration exceeds the
configured limit value for the phase/vector shift. The result is, that the power circuit breaker that disconnects
from the mains, is opened, the message "Mains phase shift" is displayed, and the logical command
variable "07.14" is enabled. The prerequisite for phase/vector shift monitoring is that the generator is operating in
a mains parallel operation (the MCB and GCB are both closed).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Phase shift monitoring is carried out according to the following
3050 parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Überwachung auf
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} 1- and 3 phase During single-phase voltage phase/vector shift monitoring,
3053
tripping occurs if the phase/vector shift exceeds the configured
threshold value (parameter 3054) in at least one of the three phases.
Note: If a phase/vector shift occurs in one or two phases, the single-
phase threshold value (parameter 3054) is taken into consideration; if
a phase/vector shift occurs in all three phases, the three-phase
threshold value (parameter 3055) is taken into consideration. Single
phase monitoring is very sensitive and may lead to nuisance tripping
if the selected phase angle settings are too small.
3 phase .........During three-phase voltage phase/vector shift monitoring, tripping
occurs only if the phase/vector shift exceeds the specified threshold
value (parameter 3055) in all three phases within 2 cycles.
NOTE
3 phase mains phase shift monitoring is only enabled if Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) is
configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
Grenzwert 1-phasig
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the electrical angle of the mains voltage shifts more than this configured value in
3054 any single phase, an alarm with the class configured in parameter 3051 is initiated.
Depending on the configured mains decoupling procedure (parameter 3110 on
page 85), the GCB, MCB, or an external CB will be opened.
Grenzwert 3-phasig
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the electrical angle of the mains voltage shifts more than this configured value in
3055 all three phases, an alarm with the class configured in parameter 3051 is initiated.
Depending on the configured mains decoupling procedure (parameter 3110 on
page 85), the GCB, MCB, or an external CB will be opened.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3051
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3052 no longer detected.
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains phase shift: Delayed engine speed Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3056 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
The mains phase shift configuration parameters are located below the mains decoupling function
menu on the display.
CAUTION
Please ensure during installation that all voltages applied to this unit are wired correctly to both sides
of the circuit breaker. Failure to do so may result in damage to the control unit and/or generation
equipment due to closing the breaker asynchronous or with mismatched phase rotations and phase
rotation monitoring enabled at all connected components (engine, generator, breakers, cable, busbars,
etc.).
This function may block a connection of systems with mismatched phases systems only under the
following conditions:
• The voltages being measured are wired correctly with respect to the phase rotation at the
measuring points (i.e. the voltage transformer in front and behind the circuit breaker)
• The measuring voltages are wired without angular phase shift or interruption from the measuring
point to the control unit
• The measuring voltages are wired to the correct terminals of the control unit (i.e. L1 of the
generator is connected with the terminal of the control unit which is intended for the L1 of the
generator)
• The LogicsManager function "Enable MCB" (refer to parameter 12923 on page 155) is false in case
of a incorrect rotation field
Correct phase rotation of the phase voltages ensures that damage will not occur during a breaker closure to either
the mains or the generator. The voltage phase rotation alarm checks the phase rotation of the voltages and the
configured phase rotation to ensure they are identical. The directions of rotation are differentiated as "clockwise"
and "counter clockwise". With a clockwise field the direction of rotation is "L1-L2-L3"; with a counter clockwise
field the direction of rotation is "L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation and the voltages
into the unit are calculated as counterclockwise the alarm will be initiated. The direction of configured rotation
being monitored by the control unit is displayed on the screen.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Mns.ph.rot. mismatch" and the logical
command variable "07.05" will be enabled.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) is configured to
"3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1768) or
if Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase rotation
is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
EN
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the following
3970 parameters
Off ............... No monitoring is carried out.
Netzdrehfeld
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} CW .............. The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CW (clock-
3974
wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction; standard
setting).
CCW ........... The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CCW (counter
clock-wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L3-L2 direction).
Alarm class Mains voltage phase rotation: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3972 no longer detected.
No ................ The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Mains voltage phase rotation: Engine delayed monitoring Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3973 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................ Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overspeed monitoring is carried out according to the following
2100 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2106
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
> Level 2).
Off ............... Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If the monitored
2104 engine speed reaches or exceeds this value for at least the delay time without
2110
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored engine speed exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2105 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored engine speed falls below
2111
the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Engine overspeed: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2101
2107
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2102 no longer detected.
2108
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Engine overspeed: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2103 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2109
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Underspeed monitoring is carried out according to the following
2150 parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may
2156
be configured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
> Level 2).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If the monitored
2154 engine speed reaches or falls below this value for at least the delay time without
2160
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored engine speed falls below the threshold value for the delay time
2155 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored engine speed exceeds
2161
the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before the delay expires the time will be
reset.
Alarm class Engine underspeed: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2151
2157
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
2152 no longer detected.
2158
No ................ The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Engine underspeed: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
2153 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
2159
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................ Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
Speed/frequency mismatch (n/f mismatch) is carried out only if an MPU is connected to the control and
parameter "Speed pickup" (parameter 1600 on page 187), is configured On. The following is valid:
• The measurement via Pickup is enabled (On):
Mismatch monitoring is carried out using the engine speed from the Pickup and the generator
frequency. If the speed/frequency mismatch or the LogicsManager is enabled and the
frequency is outside of the configured limit, an alarm will be issued.
• The measurement via Pickup is disabled (Off):
Mismatch monitoring is carried out using the generator frequency and the LogicsManager. If
the LogicsManager output is enabled and the frequency is outside of the configured limit, an
alarm will be issued.
t[min-SP]
t[min-SP]
[Hz]
Limit SP
SPHysteresis
Activation
Frequency
[Δf-n = 0 Hz]
Monitoring
active
(Requirement: delayed
engine monitoring active)
Activation
frequency
reached
Alarm
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. Monitoring of the speed/frequency/LogicsManager mismatch
2450 (n/f/LM mismatch) is carried out according to the following
parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Zulässige Differenz
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The frequency mismatch that is to be monitored is defined here. If the monitored
2454 frequency mismatch reaches or exceeds this value for at least the delay time
without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored frequency mismatch exceeds the threshold value for the delay
2455 time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored frequency
mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires
the time will be reset.
Überwachung ab
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The speed/frequency mismatch monitoring is enabled at this generator frequency.
2453
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2451
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2452 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the generator active power mismatch is carried out
2920 according to the following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the generator rated active power (parameter 1752on
2925 page 38).
If the difference between the measured generator power and the power set point
exceeds this value for at least the delay time (parameter 2923) without interruption,
the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored active power mismatch exceeds the threshold value configured in
2923 parameter 2925 for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the
monitored active power mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Generator active power mismatch: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2921
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2922 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the mains active power mismatch is carried out
2930 according to the following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the mains rated active power (parameter 1748on
2935 page 38).
If the difference between the measured import or export power and the power set
point exceeds this value for at least the delay time (parameter 2933) without
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored active power mismatch exceeds the threshold value configured in
2933 parameter 2935 for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the
monitored active power mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Mains active power mismatch: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2931
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2932 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Abschaltleistung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the generator rated active power (parameter 1752on
3125 page 38).
If the monitored generator power falls below this value, a "GCB open" command
will be issued.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored generator power does not fall below the limit configured in
3123 parameter 3125 before the time configured here expires, a "GCB open" command
will be issued together with an alarm.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3121
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3122 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the start sequence is carried out according to the
3303 following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3304
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3305 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the stop sequence is carried out according to the
2500 following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung Abstellstörung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum permissible time between the output of a stop command and the
2503 reply that the engine is stopped successfully is defined here. If the engine cannot be
stopped within this time (this means speed via the Pickup, frequency via the
generator voltage, or the LogicsManager is detected) the action specified by the
alarm class is initiated.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2501
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2502 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
NOTE
We recommend to assign this monitoring function to a discrete output to be able to shutdown the
engine with an external device to provide a shutdown redundancy.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of an unintended stop is carried out according to the
2650 following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2651
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2657 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the operating range is carried out according to the
2660 following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If one of the above mentioned conditions for an operating range failure is fulfilled,
2663 an alarm will be issued. If the respective condition is not fulfilled anymore before
the delay time expires, the delay time will be reset.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2661
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2662 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CAUTION
If load-dependent start/stop (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Load-Dependent Start/Stop on
page 193) is enabled, this monitoring function must be configured with a shutdown alarm class (C, D,
E, or F) or disable load-dependent start/stop if triggered to ensure that the next engine will be started.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the charge alternator is carried out according to the
4050 following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the voltage measured at the auxiliary excitation input D+ falls below a fixed limit
4055 for the time defined here, an alarm will be issued. If the voltage returns within the
limit before the delay time expires, the delay time will be reset.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
4051
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
4052 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Charge alternator failure: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine delayed
4053 monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled regardless
of engine speed.
Reclose Alarm: If the control initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker fails to close after the configured
number of attempts the monitoring CB alarm will be initiated (refer to parameter "GCB maximum closing
attempts", parameter 3418 on page 114).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "GCB fail to close" and the logical command
variable "08.05" will be enabled.
Breaker Open Alarm: If the control is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it fails to see that the CB is
open within the configured time in seconds after issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring CB
alarm will be initiated (refer to parameter "GCB open monitoring", parameter 3420 on page 114).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "GCB fail to open" and the logical command
variable "08.06" will be enabled.
GLS Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the GCB is carried out according to the following
2600 --- parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
GCB alarm class Circuit breaker monitoring GCB: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
GLS Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2601 ---
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
GCB maximum closing attempts Breaker monitoring GCB: Max. "GCB close" attempts 1 to 10
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in this parameter
3418 --- --- (relay output "Command: close GCB"). When the breaker reaches the configured
number of attempts, a "GCB fail to close" alarm is issued. The counter for
the closure attempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply GCB" is de-energized for
at least 5 seconds to signal a closed GCB.
GCB open monitoring Breaker monitoring GCB: Max. time until reply "GCB open" 0.10 to 5.00 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the "Reply GCB" is not detected as energized once this timer expires, a "GCB
---
3420
fail to open" alarm is issued. This timer initiates as soon as the "open
breaker" sequence begins. The alarm configured in parameter 2601 is issued.
CAUTION
If load-dependent start/stop (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Load-Dependent Start/Stop on
page 193) is enabled, this monitoring function must be configured with a shutdown alarm class (C, D,
E, or F) or disable load-dependent start/stop if triggered to ensure that the next engine will be started.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the GCB synchronization is carried out according to
3060 the following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Mindestzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If it was not possible to synchronize the GCB within the time configured here, an
3063 alarm will be issued. The message "GCB syn. timeout" is issued and the logical
command variable "08.30" will be enabled.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3061
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3062 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CAUTION
If load-dependent start/stop (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Load-Dependent Start/Stop on
page 193) is enabled, this monitoring function must be configured with a shutdown alarm class (C, D,
E, or F) or disable load-dependent start/stop if triggered to ensure that the next engine will be started.
NOTE
If an alarm is detected when attempting to close the MCB, an emergency power operation will be
carried out if the "Emergency start with MCB failure" is On.
If an alarm class higher than 'B' class has been selected it will not be possible to start the engine with
the setting "Emergency start with MCB failure" (parameter 3408 on page 190) = configured as On in an
emergency power condition.
Circuit breaker monitoring contains two alarms: A breaker reclose alarm and a breaker open alarm.
Reclose Alarm: If the control initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker fails to close after the configured
number of attempts the monitoring CB alarm will be initiated.
(Refer to parameter "MCB maximum closing attempts", parameter 3419 on page 117).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "MCB fail to close" and the logical command
variable "08.07" will be enabled.
Breaker Open Alarm: If the control is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it fails to see that the CB is
open within the configured time in seconds after issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring CB
alarm will be initiated.
(Refer to parameter "MCB open monitoring", parameter 3421 on page 117).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "MCB fail to open" and the logical command
variable "08.08" will be enabled.
The alarm classes have the following influence to the function of the unit.
N
NLS Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the MCB is carried out according to the following
2620 --- --- --- parameters.
Off ............... Monitoring is disabled.
MCB alarm class Circuit breaker monitoring MCB: Alarm class Class A/B
EN
NLS Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2621 --- --- ---
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
MCB maximum closing attempts Breaker monitoring MCB: Max. "MCB close" attempts 1 to 10
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in this parameter
3419 --- --- --- (relay output "Command: close MCB"). When the breaker reaches the configured
number of attempts, an "MCB fail to close" alarm is issued. The counter
for the closure attempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply MCB" is de-energized
for at least 5 seconds to signal a closed MCB.
MCB open monitoring Breaker monitoring MCB: Max. time until reply "MCB open" 0.10 to 5.00 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the "Reply MCB" is not detected as energized once this timer expires, an "MCB
--- --- ---
3421
fail to open" alarm is issued. This timer initiates as soon as the "open
breaker" sequence begins. The alarm configured in parameter 2621 is issued.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the MCB synchronization is carried out according to
3070 the following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Mindestzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If it was not possible to synchronize the MCB within the time configured here, an
3073 alarm will be issued. The message "MCB syn. timeout" is issued and the logical
command variable "08.31" will be enabled.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3071
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3072 longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Correct phase rotation of the phase voltages ensures that damage will not occur during a breaker closure to either
the mains or the generator. The voltage phase rotation alarm checks, if the phase rotation of the measured voltage
systems are identical. If the control detects different phase rotations of mains and generator, the alarm will be
initiated and a breaker synchronization is inhibited. However, this alarm will not prevent a dead busbar closure,
i.e. a dead bus start.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Ph.rotation mismatch" and the logical
command variable "08.33" will be enabled.
NOTE
This monitoring function is only enabled if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851) and Mains
voltage measuring (parameter 1853) are configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the measured voltage
exceeds 50 % of the rated voltage (parameter 1766) or if Generator voltage measuring (parameter 1851)
and Mains voltage measuring (parameter 1853) are configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase
rotation is not evaluated, but defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (parameter 1859)).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the following
2940 --- --- --- parameters
Off ................ No monitoring is carried out.
Alarm class Generator /Busbar / Mains phase rotation: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
2941 --- --- ---
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge Generator /Busbar / Mains phase rotation: Self acknowledgment Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
2942 --- --- --- longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CAUTION
Flexible Limits must not be used for protective functions, because the monitoring function is not
guaranteed beyond an exceeding of 320 %.
CAUTION
It is not possible to monitor temperature values in Degree Fahrenheit and pressure values in psi. Even
if the parameters 3631 or 3630 on page 156 are configured to a value display in °F or psi, flexible limit
monitoring always refers to the value in Degree Celsius or bar.
This control offers 16 flexible limits. They may be used for "limit switch" functions of all measured analog
values. It is possible to choose between alarm (warning and shutdown) and control operation via the
LogicsManager.
If an alarm class is triggered, the display indicates "Flexible limit {x}", where {x} indicates the flexible
limit 1 to 16, or the text configured using ToolKit and the logical command variable "15.{x}" will be enabled.
The following parameter description refers to flexible limit 1. The flexible limits 2 through 16 are configured
accordingly. The parameter IDs of the flexible limits 2 through 16 are listed in Table 3-54 on page 123.
NOTE
The flexible limits 13 through 16 are disabled during idle mode operation (refer to Configure
Application: Configure Engine, Idle Mode on page 188).
The flexible limits must be used to monitor analog inputs like oil pressure or coolant temperature for example.
We recommend to change the flexible limit description accordingly. Refer to Table 3-52 for configuration
examples. Naturally, the analog inputs must be configured accordingly.
Configuration example Parameter example for low oil pressure example for high coolant
monitoring temperature monitoring
Description Oil pressure Coolant temp.
Monitoring On On
Monitored data source 06.01 Analog input 1 06.02 Analog input 2
Monitoring at Underrun Overrun
Limit 200 (2.00 bar) 80 (80 °C)
Hysteresis 10 2
Delay 0.50 s 3s
Alarm class F B
Self acknowledgment No No
Delayed by engine speed Yes No
Table 3-52: Monitoring - flexible limit examples
EN
Beschreibung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A description for the respective flexible limit may be entered here. The description
T may have 4 through 16 characters and is displayed instead of the default text if this
4208
limit is exceeded.
Note: This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit configuration software
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the limit {x} is carried out according to the following
4200
parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Monitored data source FlexLimit {x} [x = 1 to 16]: Monitored data source [data source]
EN
Überwachte Datenquelle
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Any possible data source may be selected. Use the and softkeys to scroll
4206
through the list of variables and confirm your selection with the softkey. Refer to
Appendix C: Data Sources on page 305 for a list of all data sources.
These are for example:
00.05 Analog input D+
01.24 Generator total power
02.14 Mains current L1
06.01 Analog input 1
Überwachung auf
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Overrun ....... The monitored value must exceed the threshold limit for a fault to be
4204 recognized.
Underrun..... The monitored value must fall below the threshold limit for a fault to
be recognized.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The threshold limit of the value to be monitored is defined by this parameter. If this
4205
value is reached or exceeded / fallen below (dependent on parameter 4204) for at
least the delay time configured in parameter 4207 the action specified by the alarm
class is initiated after the configured delay expires.
The entry format of the threshold depends on the respective analog value.
If the monitored analog value has a reference value (refer to Appendix C:
Reference Values on page 310), the threshold is expressed as a percentage of this
reference value (-320.00 % to 320.00 %). If an analog input is monitored, the
threshold refers to the display value format (refer to Appendix C: Display Value
Format on page 317 for more information).
Refer to Table 3-53 for examples of how to configure the limit.
Example value Desired limit Reference value / display value Limit entry format
01.24 Total generator real power 160 kW Generator rated real power (parameter 1752) = 200 kW 8000 (= 80.00 %)
01.09 Generator frequency 51.5 Hz Rated frequency (parameter 1750) = 50 Hz 10300 (= 103.00 %)
00.01 Engine speed 1256 rpm Rated speed (parameter 1601) = 1500 rpm 06373 (= 63.73 %)
06.03 Analog input 3 4.25 bar Display in 0.01 bar 00425 (= 4.25 bar)
(configured to VDO 5 bar)
06.02 Analog input 2 123 °C Display in °C 00123 (= 123°C)
(configured to VDO 150°C)
06.03. Analog input 3 10 mm Display in 0.000 m 00010 (= 0.010
(configured to Linear, (parameter 1035 on page 165 configured to 0.000m) mm)
Value at 0% = 0,
Value at 100% = 1000)
Table 3-53: Monitoring - flexible limits - analog value examples
Hysterese
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} During monitoring, the actual value must exceed or fall below one of the limits
4216 defined in parameter 4205 to be recognized as out of permissible limits. For a value
to register as having returned to the permissible limits, the monitored value must
rise above or fall below this value for the hysteresis. The format for entering the
hysteresis depends on the monitored analog input and corresponds with the one of
the threshold listed in parameter 4205.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored value exceeds or falls below the threshold value for the delay time
4207 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored value falls below the
threshold (plus/minus the hysteresis, dependent on parameter 4204) before the
delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
4201
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
4202 no longer detected.
No................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons, by
energizing the appropriate discrete input or via interface.
Delayed by engine speed FlexLimit {x} [x = 1 to 16]: Engine speed delay Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
4203 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Table 3-54 shows a complete list of the parameter IDs for the flexible limits 1 through 16.
Flexible Description Monitoring Monitored Monitoring Limit Hysteresis Delay Alarm Self Delayed
limit # analog input at class acknowledge by engine
speed
1 4208 4200 4206 4204 4205 4216 4207 4201 4202 4203
2 4225 4217 4223 4221 4222 4233 4224 4218 4219 4220
3 4242 4234 4240 4238 4239 4250 4241 4235 4236 4237
4 4259 4251 4257 4255 4256 4267 4258 4252 4253 4254
5 7108 4270 4276 4274 4275 4278 4277 4271 4272 4273
6 7116 4280 4286 4284 4285 4288 4287 4281 4282 4283
7 7124 4290 4296 4294 4295 4298 4297 4291 4292 4293
8 7132 6000 6006 6004 6005 6008 6007 6001 6002 6003
9 7140 6010 6016 6014 6015 6018 6017 6011 6012 6013
10 7148 6020 6026 6024 6025 6028 6027 6021 6022 6022
11 7156 6030 6036 6034 6035 6038 6037 6031 6032 6033
12 7164 6040 6046 6044 6045 6048 6047 6041 6042 6043
13 7172 6050 6056 6054 6055 6058 6057 6051 6052 6053
14 7180 6060 6066 6064 6065 6068 6067 6061 6062 6062
15 7188 6070 6076 6074 6075 6078 6077 6071 6072 6073
16 7196 6080 6086 6084 6085 6088 6087 6081 6082 6083
Table 3-54: Monitoring - flexible limits - parameter IDs
Time until horn reset Self acknowledgment of the centralized alarm (horn) 0 to 1,000 s
EN
Zeit Hupenreset
DE
CL0 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} After each alarm of alarm class B through F occurs, the alarm LED flashes and the
1756
horn (command variable 03.05) is enabled. After the delay time 'time until horn
reset' has expired, the flashing LED changes into a steady light and the horn
(command variable 03.05) is disabled. The alarm LED flashes until the alarm has
been acknowledged either via the push button, the LogicsManager, or the interface.
Note: If this parameter is configured to 0, the horn will remain active until it will be
acknowledged.
Ext. Quittierung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} It is possible to acknowledge all alarms simultaneously from remote, e.g. with a
12490 discrete input. The logical output of the LogicsManager has to become TRUE
twice. The first time is for acknowledging the horn, the second for all alarm
messages. The On-delay time is the minimum time the input signals have to be "1".
The Off-delay time is the time how long the input conditions have to be "0" before
the next high signal is accepted. Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have
been fulfilled the alarms will be acknowledged.
The first high signal into the discrete input acknowledges the command
variable 03.05 (horn). The second high signal acknowledges all inactive
alarm messages.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix
B: "LogicsManager".
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ CAN bus overload monitoring is carried out according to the
3145 following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If more than 32 CAN bus messages per 20 ms are sent on the CAN bus within this
3148
time, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3146
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3147 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................CANopen interface 1 monitoring is carried out according to the
3150 following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum receiving break is configured with this parameter. If the interface
3154 does not receive an RPDO within this time, the action specified by the alarm class
is initiated. The delay timer is re-initialized after every message is received.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3151
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3152 longer detected.
No ................ The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3153 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ CANopen interface 1 monitoring is carried out according to the
16187 following parameters.
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum receiving break is configured with this parameter. If the interface
16186 does not receive message from the external expansion board (Node-ID) within this
time, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated. The delay timer is re-
initialized after every message is received.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
16188
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
16190 longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
16189 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
NOTE
If you are not using the exact amount of external I/O modules you have defined, the monitoring
function does not work correct.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the J1939 interface is carried out according to the
15110 following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The delay is configured with this parameter. If the interface does not receive a
15114 CAN SAE J1939 protocol message before the delay expires, the action specified
by the alarm class is initiated. The delay timer is re-initialized after every message
is received.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
15111
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
15112 no longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
15113 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Configure Monitoring: J1939 Interface, Configure CAN Interface 2, Red Stop Alarm
This watchdogs monitors, whether a specific alarm bit is received from the CAN J1939 interface. This enables to
configure the easYgen in a way that a reaction is caused by this bit (e.g. warning, shutdown).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Red stop lamp" and the logical command
variable "05.13" will be enabled.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Monitoring of the Red Stop Lamp message from the ECU is carried
15115 out according to the following parameters.
Off................ Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The red stop lamp delay is configured with this parameter. If the ECU sends the
15119 Red Stop Lamp On message, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated
after the delay configured here expires.
Alarm class J1939 Interface: Red stop lamp DM1: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F/Control
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
15116
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge J1939 Interface: Red stop lamp DM1: Self acknowledgment Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
15117 no longer detected.
No ................ The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed J1939 Interface: Red stop lamp DM1: Engine delayed Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
15118 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................ Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Configure Monitoring: J1939 Interface, Configure CAN Interface 2, Amber Warning Alarm
This watchdogs monitors, whether a specific alarm bit is received from the CAN J1939 interface. This enables to
configure the easYgen in a way that a reaction is caused by this bit (e.g. warning, shutdown).
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Amber warning lamp" and the logical
command variable "05.14" will be enabled.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Monitoring of the Amber Warning Lamp message from the ECU is
15120 carried out according to the following parameters.
Off ................Monitoring is disabled.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The amber warning lamp delay is configured with this parameter. If the ECU
15124 sends the Amber Warning Lamp On message, the action specified by the alarm
class is initiated after the delay configured here expires.
Alarm class J1939 Interface: Amber warning lamp DM1: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F/Control
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
15121
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge J1939 Interface: Amber warning lamp DM1: Self acknowledgment Yes / No
EN
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
15122 no longer detected.
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed J1939 Interface: Amber warning lamp DM1: Engine delayed Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
15123 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-37 on page 322 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Overvoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out
3450 according to the following parameters. Both values may be con-
3456
figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
> Level 2).
Off ............... Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If the monitored
3454 battery voltage reaches or exceeds this value for at least the delay time without
3460
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the monitored battery voltage exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
3455 configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored battery voltage falls
3461
below the threshold (minus the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will
be reset.
Alarm class Battery overvoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F/Control
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3451
3457
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3452 no longer detected.
3458
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Battery overvoltage: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes................ Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3453 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
3459
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................. Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Refer to Appendix E: Triggering Characteristics, Figure 3-38 on page 323 for the triggering characteristic of this
monitoring function.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Undervoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out
3500 according to the following parameters. Both values may be con-
3506
figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1
> Level 2).
Off ................ Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here. If the monitored
3504 battery voltage reaches or falls below this value for at least the delay time without
3510
interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Note
The default monitoring limit for battery undervoltage is 24 Vdc after 60 seconds.
This is because in normal operation the terminal voltage is approximately 26 Vdc
(alternator charged battery).
Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the battery voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay time configured
3505 here, an alarm will be issued. If the battery voltage exceeds the threshold (plus the
3511
hysteresis) again before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Alarm class Battery undervoltage: Alarm class (Level 1/Level 2) Class A/B/C/D/E/F/Control
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
3501
3507
Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
3502 no longer detected.
3508
No .................The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Delayed by engine speed Battery undervoltage: Engine delayed monitoring (Level 1/Level 2) Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
3503 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
3509
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No .................Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Multi-unit parameter alignment monitoring is carried out.
4070 Off................ Monitoring is disabled.
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
4071
This function may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
NOTE
After energizing the easYgen, a delay is started, which allows a possible "Missing members" alarm to
become active. This delay depends on the Node-ID of the easYgen (parameter 8950 on page 246) and
the transfer rate of a load share fast message (parameter 9921 on page 260) and may last for approx.
140 seconds for a high Node-ID (e.g. 127). This delay serves for detecting the Master of a CAN bus
connection. Approximately two minutes after energizing the easYgen, the alarm delay will be set to a
fix time, which depends on the setting of parameter 9921 on page 260 (Transfer rate LS fast message)
and is in the range between 3 to 12 seconds.
Überwachung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Multi-unit missing members monitoring is carried out.
4060 Off................ Monitoring is disabled.
Anzahl Teilnehmer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The number of units participating in load sharing is configured here.
4063
Alarm class Multi-unit missing members monitoring: Alarm class Class A/B/C/D/E/F
EN
Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
4061
This function may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
4062 no longer detected.
No ................ The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Configure Application
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Configure Application: Configure Breakers
NOTE
The assignment of the defined relays to defined functions occurs by selection of the application mode
(i.e. function "Command: Close GCB" on relay [R 6], this relay can no longer be operated via the
LogicsManager). The same way some relays are designated to specific functions, others may be
assigned to different functions. These are listed as "programmed" relays. If a relay is "programmable"
the function may be assigned to other relays via the LogicsManager by configuration. Refer to Table
3-78 on page 170 for more information.
NOTE
If the easYgen is intended to be operated in parallel with the mains, the mains voltage measuring
inputs must be connected. If an external mains decoupling is performed, jumpers between busbar and
mains voltage measuring inputs may be installed.
NOTE
Changing the application mode will not change other configured values in the parameters. The
application mode parameter is the only one.
EN
Betriebsmodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit may be configured for four different application modes. The discrete
3401 inputs and relay outputs are pre-defined dependent upon the selected application
mode. Only the screens and functions that pertain to the application mode selected
are displayed. The single line diagram in the main screen will change. Refer to the
Operation manual 37428 for additional information.
Automatic operation
• The operating mode AUTOMATIC has been selected
• No class C alarm or higher is present
• The engine is running
• The engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315on page 184) as well as the generator stable time
(parameter 3415 on page 151) have been expired or the LogicsManager function "Undelay close GCB"
(parameter 12210 on page 151) is enabled
• The generator voltage and frequency are within the configured operating range (refer to Configure
Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48)
• The MCB has been opened for at least the time configured in "Transfer time GCB↔MCB"
(parameter 3400 on page 148) ({2oc} with open transition mode only)
• The busbar voltage is below the dead bus detection limit (parameter 5820 on page 148)
Manual operation
• The operating mode MANUAL has been selected.
• No class C alarm or higher is present
• The engine is running
• The engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315on page 184) as well as the generator stable time
(parameter 3415 on page 151) have been expired
• The generator voltage and frequency are within the configured operating range (refer to Configure
Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48)
• The button "Close GCB" has been pressed
• The MCB has been open for at least the time configured in "Transfer time GCB↔MCB" (parameter 3400
on page 148) ({2oc} with open transition mode only)
• The busbar voltage is below the dead bus detection limit (parameter 5820 on page 148)
Automatic operation
• The operating mode AUTOMATIC has been selected
• The mains voltage is available and within the configured operating range (refer to Configure Monitoring:
Mains, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 83)
• The generator and busbar voltage are available and within the configured operating range (refer to
Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48)
• The differential frequency/voltage is within the configured operating range
Synchronizing the MCB
• The GCB is closed (or at least one GCB is closed in a multiple genset application)
• The busbar voltage is within the configured operating range
• The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 on page 155) signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is
energized if configured as DI 6
Synchronizing the GCB
• The MCB is closed
• The busbar voltage is within the configured operating range
• Engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 on page 184) and generator stable time (parameter 3415
on page 151) have expired or "Undelay close GCB" (parameter 12210 on page 151) is enabled
Manual operation
• Operating mode MANUAL has been selected
• The mains voltage is available and within the configured operating range (refer to Configure Monitoring:
Mains, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 83)
• The generator and busbar voltage is available and within the configured operating range (refer to
Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48)
• The differential frequency/voltage is within the configured operating range
Synchronizing the MCB
• The GCB is closed (or at least one GCB is closed in a multiple genset application)
• The busbar voltage is within the configured operating range
• The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 on page 155) signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is
energized if configured as DI 6
• The button "Close MCB" has been pressed
Synchronizing the GCB
• The MCB is closed
• The busbar voltage is within the configured operating range
• Engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 on page 184) and generator stable time (parameter 3415
on page 151) have expired or "Undelay close GCB" (parameter 12210 on page 151) is enabled
• The button "Close GCB" has been pressed
Dead bus start MCB {2oc}
The unit closes the MCB, if the following conditions are met simultaneously. The display indicates "MCB dead
bus cls".
Automatic operation
• The operating mode AUTOMATIC has been selected
• The parameter "Dead busbar closure MCB" (parameter 3431 on page 154) is configured On
• The mains voltage is available and within the configured operating range (refer to Configure Monitoring:
Mains, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 83)
• The GCB is open or has been opened for at least the "Transfer time GCBMCB" (parameter 3400 on
page 148) (open transition mode only)
• The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 on page 155) signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is
energized if configured as DI 6
• The busbar voltage is below the dead bus detection limit (parameter 5820 on page 148)
Manual operation
• Operating mode MANUAL has been selected
• The parameter "Dead busbar closure MCB" (parameter 3431 on page 154) is configured On
• The mains voltage is available and within the configured operating range (refer to Configure Monitoring:
Mains, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 83)
• The GCB is open or has been opened for at least the "Transfer time GCBMCB" (parameter 3400 on
page 148) (open transition mode only)
• The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 on page 155) signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is
energized if configured so
• The button "Close MCB" has been pressed
• The busbar voltage is below the dead bus detection limit (parameter 5820 on page 148)
Open GCB {1o} or {1oc} or {2oc}
The GCB will be opened when the "Command GCB open" is issued. The behavior of the GCB open relay
depends on the setting of parameter 3403 on page 149. If this parameter is configured as "N.O.", the relay
energizes to open the GCB, if it is configured as "N.C.", the relay de-energizes to open the GCB. The GCB will
be opened under the following conditions.
Above conditions are only valid if the GCB is closed, whereas the following conditions are valid regardless of the
GCB is open or closed.
• Prior to the MCB closing onto the dead busbar (depending on the CB logic which has been set)
• In case of an alarm of class D or F
Open MCB {2oc}
The MCB will be opened when the relay "Command: MCB open" is energized. The MCB will be opened under
the following conditions if the MCB is closed.
• If an emergency power operation is initiated (mains failure) once the generator voltage is within the
permissible limits
• Prior to the closure of the GCB (depending on the CB logic which has been set)
• Upon pressing the "MCB" or "GCB" softkey (dependent upon the configured CB logic) in MANUAL
operating mode
Transition Mode
Breaker transition mode Breaker: Transition mode Parallel / Interchange / Closed T. / Open T. / External
EN
Schaltermodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control unit automatically controls the two breakers (MCB and GCB). Up to
3411 --- --- ---
five (5) breaker logic modes may be selected. These are:
{1oc} {2oc}
--- EXTERNAL
PARALLEL PARALLEL
--- OPEN TRANSITION
--- CLOSED TRANSITION
--- INTERCHANGE
A detailed explanation for each mode may be found in the following text.
Breaker transition mode 1 Breaker: Transition mode 1 Parallel / Interchange / Closed T. / Open T. / External
EN
Schaltermodus Alternative 1
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control unit automatically controls the two breakers (MCB and GCB). Up to
3412 --- --- --- five (5) breaker logic modes may be selected. These are:
{1oc} {2oc}
--- EXTERNAL
PARALLEL PARALLEL
--- OPEN TRANSITION
--- CLOSED TRANSITION
--- INTERCHANGE
A detailed explanation for each mode may be found in the following text.
LS-Modus Alternat. 1
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the transition mode
12931 --- --- --- configured in parameter 3412 will be used instead of the standard transition mode
configured in parameter 3411. The LogicsManager and its default settings are
explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
NOTE
Parallel breaker logic must be selected for the following operation modes:
• Isolated operation
• Mains parallel operation
NOTE
When a stop command is issued to the engine, soft loading (power reduction) is carried out before
opening the GCB, except an alarm of class D or F is present.
NOTE
For this breaker logic to function correctly, the mains power measurement must be connected
properly. The following applies for the power display:
• Positive mains power = export power
• Negative mains power = import power
In the event of a start request, a change is made from mains to generator supply. The following occurs:
• The GCB is synchronized and closed
• The generator assumes load until the imported mains interchange real power has reached 3 % of the
"Generator rated active power" (parameter 1752)
• The MCB is opened
When a stop request has been issued, a change is made from generator to mains supply. The following occurs:
• The MCB is synchronized and closed
• The generator sheds load until real power has reached the "Unload limit" (parameter 3125)
• The generator power factor is controlled to "1.00" (unity)
• The GCB is opened
NOTE
The circuit breakers are opened irrespective of the power.
In the event of an engine start request, a change is made from mains to generator supply. The following occurs:
• The GCB is synchronized and closed
• The MCB is opened and the generator assumes all loads
After the engine stop request has been issued, a change is made from generator to mains supply. The following
occurs:
• The MCB is synchronized and closed
• The GCB is opened and the mains assume all loads
NOTE
The maximum time between the reply from the CB and the CB open command is 500 ms.
In the event of an engine start request, a change is made from mains to generator supply. The following occurs:
• The MCB is opened
• The GCB is closed after the time configured in "Transfer time GCB<->MCB" (parameter 3400 on page 148)
has expired
After the engine stop request has been issued, a change is made from generator to mains supply. The following
occurs:
• The GCB is opened
• The MCB is closed after the time configured in "Transfer time GCB<->MCB" parameter 3400 on page 148
has expired
All breaker control (especially the CB closing instructions) must be carried out via master controller (e.g. a PLC).
The easYgen controller always issues additionally the breaker open command under fault conditions and in the
breaker unloading states (Unloading GCB) if the stop request is active.
Overview {2oc}
Overview {1oc}
Transfer time GCB↔MCB Breaker: Transfer time GCB ↔ MCB 0.10 to 99.99 s
EN
Pausenzeit GLS↔NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Switching from generator supply to mains supply or from mains supply to
3400 --- --- --- generator supply occurs automatically if the operating conditions have been met.
The time between the reply "power circuit breaker is open" and a close pulse is
set by this parameter. This time applies for both directions. During this time the
consumers are de-energized.
Note: This is only valid, if parameter 3411 on page 143 is configured to OPEN
TRANSITION
Dead bus detection max. volt. Operating values, maximum voltage for dead bus detection 0 to 30 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the busbar voltage falls below this percentage of the busbar 1 rated voltage
5820 (parameter 1781 on page 38), a dead bus condition is detected and the logical
command variable 02.21 (Busbar 1 is dead) becomes TRUE.
NOTE
Normally Open Contacts (No): If a voltage is applied to the discrete input terminals, the discrete input
is enabled (i.e. in the operating state). The controller only recognizes a fault condition or control
operation via the discrete input when the discrete input terminals are energized. If fault monitoring
is performed via Normally Open contacts, the state of the system should be monitored by the state
of the discrete input.
Normally Closed Contacts (NC): If a voltage is applied to the discrete input terminals, the discrete input
is not enabled (i.e. in the idle state). The controller only recognizes a fault condition or control
operation via the discrete input when the discrete input terminals are de-energized.
no current flow
current flow
RELEASE RELEASE
Relay operates Relay releases
0V 0V
GCB open relay Breaker: "Command: GCB open" relay N.O. / N.C. / Not used
EN
GLS Öffnen-Kontakt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} N.O. (normally open) ... The relay "command: GCB open" will be energized to
3403 ---
open the GCB and will be de-energized again after the discrete input
"Reply GCB" is energized to signal the control that the GCB is open.
N.C. (normally closed) . The relay "command: GCB open" will be de-energized to
open the GCB and will be energized again after the discrete input
"Reply GCB" is energized to signal the control that the GCB is open.
Not used ....... A GCB open relay is not used and relay R7 (Command: open GCB)
is freely programmable. In this case, parameter 3414 must be
configured to "Constant" to open the breaker.
GLS Schließen-Befehl
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Impulse ........The relay "Command: GCB close" issues an add-on pulse. If the
3414 --- --- relay is configured in this manner a holding coil and sealing contacts
must be installed externally to the control unit. The DI "Reply GCB"
is used to identify closed contacts.
Constant.......The relay "Command: close GCB" may be wired directly into the
holding circuit for the power circuit breaker. If this method is utilized
it is recommended that isolation relays are used. After the connect
pulse has been issued and the reply of the power circuit breaker has
been received, the relay "Command: close GCB" remains energized.
If a class C alarm or higher occurs or a GCB open command is
issued, this relay de-energizes.
In both cases the relay "Command: GCB open" energizes to open the GCB if
parameter 3403 is not configured as "Not used".
GCB time pulse Breaker: Pulse duration to close the GCB 0.10 to 0.50 s
EN
GLS Impulsdauer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being utilized.
3416 ---
Synchronization GCB Breaker: Synchronization frequency GCB Slip frequency / Phase matching
EN
Synchronisierung GLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Slip frequency .... The frequency controller adjusts the frequency in a way, that the
5729 --- --- --- frequency of the source (generator) is marginal greater than the target
(busbar). When the synchronizing conditions are reached, a close
command will be issued. The slipping frequency depends on the
setting of "Slip frequency offset" (parameter 5502 on page 221).
Phase matching .. The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the source
(generator) to that of the target (busbar), in view of turning the phase
difference to zero.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 on
5700 --- --- page 38).
The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the generator circuit
breaker is configured here.
If the difference between generator and busbar voltage does not exceed the value
configured here and the generator voltage is within the operating voltage window
(parameters 5800/5801 on page 48), the "Command: GCB close" may be issued.
Pos. freq. differential GCB Breaker: Positive frequency differential GCB 0.02 to 0.49 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
5701 --- --- differential frequency is below the configured differential frequency. This value
specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to positive slip
generator frequency is higher than the busbar frequency).
Neg. freq. differential GCB Breaker: Negative frequency differential GCB -0.49 to 0.00 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
5702 --- --- differential frequency is above the configured differential frequency. This value
specifies the lower frequency limit (negative value corresponds to negative slip
generator frequency is less than the busbar frequency).
Max positive phase angle GCB Breaker: Max. permissible positive phase angle GCB 0.0 to 60.0 °
EN
Max. pos. Winkeldifferenz GLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5729 is configured to
5703 --- --- "Phase matching".
The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the leading
phase angle between generator and busbar is below the configured maximum
permissible angle.
Max negative phase angle GCB Breaker: Max. permissible negative phase angle GCB -60.0 to 0.0 °
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5729 is configured to
5704 --- --- "Phase matching".
The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
lagging phase angle between generator and busbar is above the configured
minimum permissible angle.
Phase matching GCB dwell time Breaker: Phase matching dwell time of GCB 0.0 to 60.0 s
EN
Verweildauer GLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5729 is configured to
5707 --- --- "Phase matching".
This is the minimum time that the generator voltage, frequency, and phase angle
must be within the configured limits before the breaker will be closed.
Dead bus closure GCB Breaker: Dead busbar closure GCB On / Off
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................A dead busbar closure is allowed if the required conditions are met.
3432 --- --- Off ................A GCB close command to a dead busbar is prevented. A
synchronization is still possible.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The time configured here begins to count down once the engine monitoring delay
3415 --- timer has expired. This permits for an additional delay time before the breaker is
closed in order to ensure that none of the engine delayed watchdogs trips. It is
possible to bypass this delay time through the LogicsManager (parameter 12210
on page 151) in the event an emergency operation condition (mains failure)
occurs.
Unnecessary CB switching operations and voltage interruptions should be avoided
by utilizing this parameter.
Schaltereigenzeit GLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The inherent closing time of the GCB corresponds to the lead-time of the close
5705 --- --- command. The close command will be issued independent of the differential
frequency at the entered time before the synchronous point.
GLS unverzögert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the GCB will be
12210 --- --- closed immediately (without waiting for engine speed delay and generator stable
timer to expire). When using the standard setting, the GCB will be closed without
delay in emergency power operation. The LogicsManager and its default settings
are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is used for special circuit breakers to put the breaker into a defined initial
3405 --- --- state or to enable closing at all.
YES .............. Before every close-pulse, an open-pulse is issued for 1 second. A
CB close pulse is enabled only after the open pulse is issued.
NO ................ The CB close pulse is enabled without being preceded by a CB
open pulse.
GCB open time pulse Breaker: GCB open time pulse 0.10 to 9.90 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This time defines the length of the GCB open time pulse, if the automatic switch
5708 --- --- unblocking GCB is activated.
NLS Ansteuerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Off ................A MCB is not operated. Relay R5 (38/39/40) can be freely used.
5732 --- --- --- 1 Relay .........A MCB is operated and if necessary monitored. Relay R5
(38/39/40) is used and fixed to this function.
NLS Ansteuerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Off ................A MCB is not operated. Relay R5 (38/39/40) can be freely used.
5733 --- --- --- 1 Relay .........A MCB is operated and if necessary monitored. Relay R5
(38/39/40) is used and fixed to this function.
2 Relays ........A MCB is operated and if necessary monitored. Relay R5
(38/39/40) is used for the open function, relay R8 (82/83) to close
it. The opening and closing is carried out with the pulse method.
NOTE
Even if the MCB operation (Parameter 5732/5733) is switched off and the breaker application mode is
configured to GCB/MCB, the reply of the MCB is observed anyway.
MCB time pulse Breaker: Pulse duration to close the MCB 0.10 to 0.50 s
EN
NLS Impulsdauer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being utilized.
3417 --- --- ---
Synchronization MCB Breaker: Synchronization frequency MCB Slip frequency / Phase matching
EN
Synchronisierung NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Slip frequency The frequency controller adjusts the frequency in a way, that the
5730 --- --- --- frequency of the source (busbar) is marginal greater than the target
(mains). When the synchronizing conditions are reached, a close
command will be issued. The slipping frequency is positive to avoid
reverse power.
Phase matching The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the source
(busbar) to that of the target (mains), in view of turning the phase
difference to zero.
EN
Voltage differential MCB Breaker: Voltage differential MCB 0.50 to 20.00 %
Max. Spg. Differenz NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 on page 38).
5710 --- --- ---
The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the mains circuit
breaker is configured here.
If the difference between mains and busbar voltage does not exceed the value
configured here and the mains voltage is within the operating voltage window
(parameters 5810/5811 on page 84), the "Command: MCB close" may be issued.
Pos. freq. differential MCB Breaker: Positive frequency differential MCB 0.02 to 0.49 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
5711 --- --- --- differential frequency is below the configured differential frequency. This value
specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to positive slip
busbar frequency is higher than the mains frequency).
Neg. freq. differential MCB Breaker: Negative frequency differential MCB -0.49 to 0.00 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
5712 --- --- --- differential frequency is above the configured differential frequency. This value
specifies the lower frequency limit (negative value corresponds to negative slip
busbar frequency is less than the mains frequency).
Max positive phase angle MCB Breaker: Max. permissible positive phase angle MCB 0.0 to 60.0 °
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5730 is configured to
5713 --- --- --- "Phase matching".
The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
leading phase angle between busbar and mains is below the configured
maximum permissible angle.
Max negative phase angle MCB Breaker: Max. permissible negative phase angle MCB -60.0 to 0.0 °
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5730 is configured to
5714 --- --- --- "Phase matching".
The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
lagging phase angle between busbar and mains is above the configured minimum
permissible angle.
Phase matching MCB dwell time Breaker: Phase matching dwell time of MCB 0.0 to 60.0 s
EN
Verweildauer NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5730 is configured to
5717 --- --- --- "Phase matching".
This is the minimum time that the generator/busbar voltage, frequency, and
phase angle must be within the configured limits before the breaker will be
closed.
Dead bus closure MCB Breaker: Dead busbar closure MCB On / Off
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ A dead busbar closure is allowed if the required conditions are
3431 --- --- --- met.
Off ............... An MCB close command to a dead busbar is prevented. A
synchronization is still possible.
EN
Freigabe NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the MCB will be
12923 --- --- --- enabled. The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271
in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
DI 6 is pre-assigned by default to this function, but may be configured freely.
Closing time MCB Breaker: Synchronization: Inherent delay of MCB for synchronization 40 to 300 ms
EN
Schaltereigenzeit NLS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The inherent closing time of the MCB corresponds to the lead-time of the close
5715 --- --- ---
command. The close command will be issued independent of the differential
frequency at the entered time before the synchronous point.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is used for special circuit breakers to put the breaker into a defined initial
3407 --- --- state or to enable closing at all.
YES .............. Before every close-pulse, an open-pulse is issued for 1 second. A
CB close pulse is enabled only after the open pulse is issued.
NO ............... The CB close pulse is enabled without being preceded by a CB
open pulse.
MCB open time pulse Breaker: MCB open time pulse 0.10 to 9.90 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This time defines the length of the MCB open time pulse, if the automatic switch
5718 --- ---
unblocking MCB is activated.
Synchronization mode Breaker: Synchronization mode Off / Permissive / Check / Run / Controlled by LM
EN
Synchronisiermodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Off ............... The synchronization is disabled; the frequency and voltage
5728 --- --- --- adaptation for synchronization is not active.
Permissive ... The unit acts as a synch check device. The unit will not issue
speed or voltage bias commands to achieve a synchronization, but
if synchronization conditions are matched (frequency, phase,
voltage and phase angle), the control will issue a breaker close
command. There are two different functionalities of this option
depending on the setting of parameter 3414 on page 150 (GCB
close command):
GCB close command set to Impulse
The GCB close command is pulsed as long as the synchronization
conditions are matched.
GCB close command set to Constant
The GCB close command remains enabled as long as the
synchronization conditions are matched.
Check .......... Used for checking a synchronizer prior to commissioning. The
control actively synchronizes generator(s) by issuing speed and
voltage bias commands, but does not issue a breaker closure
command.
Run .............. Normal operating mode. The control actively synchronizes and
issues breaker closure commands.
Temperaturanzeige in
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} °C....................... The temperature is displayed in °C (Celsius).
3631
°F ....................... The temperature is displayed in °F (Fahrenheit).
Druckanzeige in
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} bar ..................... The pressure is displayed in Bar.
3630
psi ...................... The pressure is displayed in psi.
NOTE
Refer to the Application Manual 37429 for a detailed configuration example of an analog input.
Analog Inputs: Characteristics "Table A" And "Table B" (9 Point Scaling)
The characteristic curves of "Table A" and "Table B" (freely configurable over 9 defined percentage points) are
independently configurable for all analog inputs. Each percentage point may be scaled to related values measured
from the analog input (0 to 500 Ohm or 0 to 20 mA), so that the actual display reflects the measured values (i.e.
200 to 600 kW). The so developed characteristic curve can be used for visualization and monitoring via the
configuration to "Table A" (for Table A) as well as "Table B" (for Table B).
[corresponds] Value
600 kW {y9}
kW
550 kW {y8}
A = 380
0 kW
500 kW {y7}
580 kW
330 kW
A = 60
10.0 m
450 kW {y6}
= 540 kW
A=
= 260 kW
20.0 m
8.0 mA
18.0 m
400 kW {y5}
= 225 kW
465 kW
350 kW {y4}
= 200 kW
15.0 m
5.0 mA
A=
300 kW {y3}
2.0 mA
12.0 m
0.0 mA
250 kW {y2}
200 kW {y1}
Input
{x1} {x2} {x3} {x4} {x5} {x6} {x7} {x8} {x9}
0 10 25 40 50 60 75 90 100 [%]
Range:
0 to 20 mA 0.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 20.0 [mA]
0 to 500 Ohm 0.0 50.0 125.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 375.0 450.0 500.0 [Ohm]
Figure 3-16: Analog input scaling - table (example)
NOTE
The X and Y junction may be moved within the range of values (the junctions don't have to be
equidistant).
When configuring the X coordinates, ensure the coordinates always increase in scale continuously. In
the following example the first set of x/y coordinates are correct and the second set of x/y coordinates
are wrong:
• correct X-coord. 0 % 10 % 20 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 80 % 90 % 100 %
Y-coordinate -100 -95 -500 -10 +3 +17 +18 +100 +2000
• wrong X-coord. 0 % 10 % 20 % 60 % 20 % 30 % 80 % 40 % 100 %
Y-coordinate -100 -50 -95 +18 +17 +3 -10 +2000 +100
If the first X coordinate is >0%, all values smaller than the first X value will be output with the first
Y value. If the last Y value is <100%, all higher values will be output with the value of Y9.
The following parameters are used to configure the characteristic curve. Refer to Table 3-71 for the parameter
IDs of the individual parameters for all scaling points of tables A and B.
X-Wert {a}
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The analog input is assigned to a curve. This parameter defines the actual
3560
percentage assigned to each of the nine points along the X-axis of the total range of
the selected hardware for analog input. For example: If a 0 to 20 mA input is
configured and the X1-coordinate = 0%, then the value configured for Y1 is output
for an input of 0 mA.
Y-Wert {b}
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the Y-coordinate (the displayed and monitored value) at the
3550
corresponding X-coordinate. For example: If a 0 to 20mA input is configured and
the X2-coordinate = 10%, then the value configured for the Y2-coordinate is output
for an input of 2 mA.
Table 3-71 shows a complete list of the parameter IDs for the table scaling points.
NOTE
Monitoring of the analog inputs (overrun/underrun) must be configured manually to the flexible limits
(refer to Configure Monitoring: Flexible Limits on page 120).
Beschreibung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The event history will store this text message and it is also displayed on the
T visualization screen. If the programmed limit value of the analog input has been
1025
1075 reached or exceeded this text is displayed in the control unit screen. The text may
1125
have 1 through 16 characters.
Type Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Type Off / VDO 5bar / VDO 10bar /
EN
NOTE
The following parameters "User defined min display value" and "User defined max display value" are
only visible if the previous parameter "Type" is configured to "Linear".
User defined min display value Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: User defined minimum display value -32000 to 32000
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value to be displayed for the minimum of the input range must be entered
1001
1051
here.
1101
User defined max display value Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: User defined maximum display value -32000 to 32000
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value to be displayed for the maximum of the input range must be entered
1002
1052
here.
1102
NOTE
The following parameters "Sender value at display min" and "Sender value at display max" are only
visible if the previous parameter "Type" is configured to "Linear", "Table A", or "Table B".
EN Sender value at display min. Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Source value at display minimum 0.00 to 100.00 %
Quellwert bei min Anzeige
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the
1039
1089
minimum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies the
1139 lower limit of the hardware range to be measured.
Sender value at display max. Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Source value at display maximum 0.00 to 100.00 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the
1040
1090
maximum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies
1140 the upper limit of the hardware range to be measured.
Example: If the input range is 0 to 500 Ohm where 0 Ohm corresponds with 0 %
and 500 Ohm corresponds with 100 %, and the value configured here is 36 %, an
analog input value of 180 Ohm would correspond with the maximum value
configured for the display.
NOTE
The following parameter "Sender type" must be configured to "0 to 500 Ohm", if "Type" (parameter
1000, 1050, or 1100) is configured to "VDO xx" or "Pt100".
Auswahl Hardware
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The software in the control unit may be configured for various types of sensors.
1020
1070
The configurable ranges apply to the linear analog input. Configurable ranges are:
1120 0 to 500 Ohm The measuring range of the analog input is 0- to 500 Ohm.
0 Ohm = 0 %, 500 Ohm = 100 %.
0 to 20 mA ... The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 20 mA.
0 mA = 0 %, 20 mA = 100 %.
NOTE
The following parameters "Offset" and "Sender connection type" are only visible if the previous
parameter "Sender type" is configured to "0 to 500 Ohm".
Offset
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The resistive input (the "0 to 500Ohm" analog input) may be calculated with a
1046
1096
permanent offset to adjust for inaccuracies. If the offset feature is utilized, the value
1146 configured in this parameter will be added to/subtracted from the measured
resistive value. This has the following effect to the measured values (please note
tables starting on page 327):
-20.0 to 0.1 Ohm
VDO temperature: The displayed value will decrease.
VDO pressure: The displayed value will increase.
+0.1 to 20.0 Ohm
VDO temperature: The displayed value will increase.
VDO pressure: The displayed value will decrease.
Sender connection type Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Connection type Two-pole / Single-pole
EN
Anschluß Typ
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the type of the used sender. Refer to the Installation Manual
1041
1091
37426 for wiring details.
1141 Two-pole ......A two-wire sender is connected to the easYgen. The unit measures
the sender values between the dedicated terminals.
Single-pole ...A one-wire sender is connected to the easYgen. The unit measures
the sender values between the terminal of the analog input and the
engine ground terminal.
Monitoring wire break Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3] wire break monitoring Off / High / Low / High/Low
EN
Drahtbruchüberw.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The analog input can be monitored for a wire break. The following configurations
1003
1053
are used to monitor for a wire break:
1103 Off ................No wire break monitoring is performed.
High ..............If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot), this is
identified as a wire break.
Low...............If the actual value falls below the minimum value (undershoot), this
is identified as a wire break.
High/Low .....If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot) or falls
below the minimum value (undershoot), this is identified as a wire
break.
NOTE
Monitoring of the analog inputs (overrun/underrun) must be configured manually to the flexible limits
(refer to Configure Monitoring: Flexible Limits on page 120).
If the control unit detects that the measuring range for an analog input has been exceeded and an
alarm is issued, the limit value monitoring of this analog input is disabled and an error message is
displayed.
The measuring range is recognized as being exceeded and an alarm is issued:
• 0 to 20 mA
Minimum value .........2 mA ................Undershooting
Maximum value.........20.5 mA ...........Overshooting
• 0 to 500 Ohm
Minimum value .........5 Ohm .............Undershooting (Offset = 0 Ohm)
Maximum value.........515 Ohm .........Overshooting (Offset = 0 Ohm)
Note: Depending on what was configured for the offset value (parameter 1046/1096/1146 on page 162)
the displayed value may be shifted. This may result in a broken wire being recognized early or later
than the actual value being measured. (An offset of +20ohms will recognize a wire break at 25ohms
instead of 5ohms.)
NOTE
A wire break is indicated in ToolKit by displaying an analog input value of 3276.6.
NOTE
The following two parameters are only visible, if wire break monitoring (parameter 1003/1053/1103 on
page 162) is not configured Off.
Wire break alarm class Analog in. {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Alarm class wire break monit. Class A/B/C/D/E/F/Control
EN
Drahtbruch Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} See chapter "Alarm" on page 269.
1004
1054
1104 Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what action
should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Self acknowledge wire break Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Self acknowledged Yes / No
EN
Drahtbruch selbstquitt.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
1005
1055
longer detected.
1105 No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
Filter time constant Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Filter time constant Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
EN
Filter
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A filter time constant may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog input
10113
10114
reading. This filter time constant assesses the average of the signal according to the
10116 following formula:
1
Cut − off − frequency = , whereby "N" is the parameter.
20ms × 2 × π × 2 N −1
Bargraph minimum Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Bar graph minimum value -9999 to 9999
EN
Bargraph Minimum
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here. The
3632
3634
value must be entered according to the display format, which refers to the analog
3636 input type (parameter 1000 on page 160).
Bargraph maximum Analog input {x} [x = 1 to 3]: Bar graph maximum value -9999 to 9999
EN
Bargraph Maximum
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The end value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here. The
3633
3635
value must be entered according to the display format, which refers to the analog
3637 input type (parameter 1000 on page 160).
EN
Zahlenformat
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If a sign to denote a negative measured value (i.e. –10) is required, then the
T first "0" of the numeric display is utilized for this symbol.
1035
1085
1135
To display the measuring value of the analog input for the analog input types linear
as well as Table A and Table B (parameter 1000 on page 160) correctly this
parameter is to be used to define the format. The zeros in the numeric display are
used for the measuring values and are configurable. The placeholders for the digits
may have symbols (i.e. commas).
Note
• This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
• This parameter only applies to the linear and the user defined Table A and
Table B (parameter 1000 on page 160) analog input types.
• The displayed value should be configured with the same number of digits as the
desired value to be measured.
• The measured value will be displayed from right to left. If the measured value is
larger than the number of digits in the display, only a portion of the measured
value will be shown. An example of this would be a display of three digits is
configured when four digits will be needed. Instead of the number "1234" being
displayed only "234" will be shown.
Examples
Note
• If the analog input type (parameter 1000 on page 160) is configured to VDO or
Pt100, the following formats apply:
VDO 5 bar display in 0.01 bar – example: 5.0 bar > ToolKit display: 50,0
VDO 10 bar display in 0.01 bar – example: 6.6 bar > ToolKit display: 66,0
VDO 120°C display in °C – example: 69°C > ToolKit display: 6,9
VDO 150°C display in °C – example: 73°C > ToolKit display: 7,3
Pt100 display in °C – example: 103°C > ToolKit display: 10,3
NOTE
Alarm inputs may also be configured as control inputs and then be used as command variables in the
LogicsManager.
Discrete inputs may be configured to normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) states. In the state N.O., no
potential is present during normal operation; if an alarm is issued or control operation is performed, the input is
energized. In the state N.C., a potential is continuously present during normal operation; if an alarm is issued or
control operation is performed, the input is de-energized.
Vdc (GND)
Discrete input (N.O.)
GND (Vdc)
Vdc (GND)
Discrete input (N.C.)
GND (Vdc)
Figure 3-17: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic
NOTE
All reply messages from breakers are evaluated as N.C.
NOTE
The DIs 1 to 5 are pre-configured to various functions and differ in their default values. However, they
may still be configured freely. The DIs 7 & 8 are always used for the circuit breaker replies and cannot
be configured.
EN
DI {x} Text
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the discrete input is enabled with alarm class, this text is displayed on the
T control unit screen. The event history will store this text message as well. The
1400
text may have 4 through 16 characters.
Note: If the DI is used as control input with the alarm class "Control", you may
enter here its function (e.g. external acknowledgement) for a better overview
within the configuration.
DI {x} Funktion
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The discrete inputs may be operated by an normally open (N.O.) or normally
1201 closed (N.C.) contact. The idle circuit current input can be used to monitor for a
wire break. A positive or negative voltage polarity referred to the reference point
of the DI may be applied.
N.O. ............. The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by energizing the input
(normally open).
N.C............... The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by de-energizing the
input (normally closed).
DI {x} Verzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A delay time in seconds can be assigned to each alarm or control input. The
1200 discrete input must be enabled without interruption for the delay time before the
unit reacts. If the discrete input is used within the LogicsManager this delay is
taken into account as well.
DI {x} Alarmklasse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} see chapter "Alarm Classes" on page 269.
1202
An alarm class may be assigned to the discrete input. The alarm class is executed
when the discrete input is enabled.
If "control" has been configured, there will be no entry in the event history and a
function out of the LogicsManager (description at page 270) can be assigned to
the discrete input.
DI {x} Delayed by engine speed Discrete input: Engine delayed monitoring Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine
1203 delayed monitoring is enabled. The engine monitoring delay time
(parameter 3315 on page 184) must expire prior to fault monitoring
being enabled for parameters assigned this delay.
No ................ Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled
regardless of engine speed.
DI {x} Selbstquittierend
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is
1204 no longer detected.
No ................. The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
condition is no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged
and reset by manually pressing the appropriate buttons or by
activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowledgement"
(via a discrete input or via an interface).
NOTE
If a discrete input has been configured with a shut-down alarm that has been enabled to self-
acknowledge, and has been configured as engine delayed the following scenario may happen:
• The discrete input shuts down the engine because of its alarm class.
• Due to the engine stopping, all engine delayed alarms are ignored.
• The alarm class is acknowledged automatically.
• The alarm will self-acknowledge and clear the fault message that shut the engine down. This
prevents the fault from being analyzed. After a short delay, the engine will restart.
• After the engine monitoring delay expires, the fault that originally shut down the engine will do so
again. This cycle will continue to repeat until corrected.
The preceding parameters are used to configure the discrete inputs 1 through 10. The parameter IDs refer to DI 1.
Refer to Table 3-75 for the parameter IDs of the parameters DI 2 through DI 10.
DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 9 DI 10
Text 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1480 1488
Operation 1201 1221 1241 1261 1281 1301 1361 1381
Delay 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1360 1380
Alarm class 1202 1222 1242 1262 1282 1302 1362 1382
Delayed by engine speed 1203 1223 1243 1263 1283 1303 1363 1383
Self acknowledged 1204 1224 1244 1264 1284 1304 1364 1384
Table 3-75: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs
NOTE
The DIs 7 & 8 are always used for the circuit breaker replies and cannot be configured.
External DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 8
Text 16200 16210 16220 16230 16240 16250 16260 16270
Operation 16001 16011 16021 16031 16041 16051 16061 16071
Delay 16000 16010 16020 16030 16040 16050 16060 16070
Alarm class 16002 16012 16022 16032 16042 16052 16062 16072
Delayed by engine speed 16003 16013 16023 16033 16043 16053 16063 16073
Self acknowledged 16004 16014 16024 16034 16044 16054 16064 16074
External DI 9 DI 10 DI 11 DI 12 DI 13 DI 14 DI 15 DI 16
Text 16280 16290 16300 16310 16320 16330 16340 16350
Operation 16081 16091 16101 16111 16121 16131 16141 16151
Delay 16080 16090 16100 16110 16120 16130 16140 16150
Alarm class 16082 16092 16102 16112 16122 16132 16142 16152
Delayed by engine speed 16083 16093 16103 16113 16123 16133 16143 16153
Self acknowledged 16084 16094 16104 16114 16124 16134 16144 16154
Table 3-77: External discrete inputs - parameter IDs
Some outputs are assigned a function according to the application mode (see following table).
Ready for op. Off Digital outputs: LogicsManager for Ready for operation OFF LogicsManager
EN
Betriebsbe abgef.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The "Ready for operation OFF" relay is energized by default if the power supply
12580
exceeds 8 V. Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the
relay will be de-energized. This LogicsManager output may be configured with
additional conditions, which may signal a PLC an "out of operation" condition by
de-energizing the relay on terminals 41/42, like "shutdown alarm" or No "AUTO
mode" present. The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on
page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
CAUTION
The discrete output "Ready for operation OFF" must be wired in series with an emergency stop
function. This means that it must be ensured that the generator circuit breaker is opened and the
engine is stopped if this discrete output is de-energized. We recommend to signal this fault
independently from the unit if the availability of the plant is important.
Relais {x}
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the relay will be
12110 energized. The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271
in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Above parameter IDs refers to R 2. Refer to Table 3-79 for the parameter IDs of the parameters for R 3 to R 11.
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R 10 R 11
Parameter ID 12580 12110 12310 12320 12130 12140 12150 12160 12170 12180 12560
Table 3-79: Discrete outputs - parameter IDs
DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 DO 4 DO 5 DO 6 DO 7 DO 8
Parameter ID 12330 12340 12350 12360 12370 12380 12390 12400
DO 9 DO 10 DO 11 DO 12 DO 13 DO 14 DO 15 DO 16
Parameter ID 12410 12420 12430 12440 12450 12460 12470 12480
Table 3-80: External discrete outputs - parameter IDs
The analog outputs 1 and 2 may either be configured as analog or PWM outputs. The analog outputs are prepared
for speed and voltage bias signal for a speed controller and voltage regulator with an output signal of 0 to 20 mA
/ 0 to 10 V by default. Table 3-81 shows the default values for the analog outputs 1 and 2 as well as two
configuration examples. Example 1 is for a generator active power output with a range of -20 kW to 220 kW via
a 4 to 20 mA signal (generator rated power = 200 kW). Example 2 is for a speed bias output via a PWM signal.
In comparision to the analog outputs 1 and 2 are the outputs 3 and 4 purely prepared to 0/4 to 20 mA. The outputs
are freely scalable. Each analog source of the analog manager can be passed to this outputs.
NOTE
When a burden of 500 Ohm is applied to the analog outputs 3 and 4, the hardware type for voltage can
also be used.
Data source Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: Data source refer to text below
EN
Datenquelle
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The data source may be selected from the available data sources. Use the "+" and "–
5200 " softkeys to scroll through the list of sources and confirm your selection with the
5214
5228 Enter softkey. Refer to Appendix C on page 305 for a list of all data sources.
5242
Source value at minimal output Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: Source value at minimal output -32000 to 32000
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value from the data source must exceed the value configured here to raise the
5204
5218
output signal above 0 %. Negative percentage values may be used to change the
5232 sign, e.g. for power.
5246
The entry format of the value depends on the selected data source. If the monitored
analog value has a reference value (refer to Appendix C: Reference Values on
page 310), the threshold is expressed as a percentage of this reference value (-
320.00 % to 320.00 %). If an analog input is monitored, the threshold refers to the
display value format (refer to Appendix C: Display Value Format on page 317 for
more information).
Source value at maximal output Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: Source value at maximal output -32000 to 32000
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the value from the data source reaches the value configured here, the output
5206
5220
signal will reach 100 %. Negative percentage values may be used to change the
5234 sign, e.g. for power.
5248
The entry format of the value depends on the selected data source. If the monitored
analog value has a reference value (refer to Appendix C: Reference Values on
page 310), the threshold is expressed as a percentage of this reference value (-
320.00 % to 320.00 %). If an analog input is monitored, the threshold refers to the
display value format (refer to Appendix C: Display Value Format on page 317 for
more information).
Filter time constant Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: Filter time constant Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7
EN
Filter
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A filter time constant may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog output
5203
5217
value. This filter time constant assesses the average of the signal according to the
5231 following formula:
5245
1
Cut − off − frequency = , whereby "N" is the parameter.
20ms × 2 × π × 2 N −1
Note: The filter is not applied to the analog output display value, i.e. the end value
of the analog output is displayed immediately.
Selected hardware type Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: Selected hardware type select from list below
EN
Ausgangstyp
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is used to configure the appropriate type of analog controller
5201 signal. The range of the analog output is configured here. The available ranges are
5215
5229 listed below. It is possible to configure the following settings:
5243
Off ................ No analog output signal will be issued.
user defined . A maximum range of +/-20 mA / +/-10 V may be limited using the
parameters 5208 and 5209 on page 175 to obtain a user defined
range.
User defined min. output value Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: User defined minimum output value 0 to 100 %
EN
Frei definierbares Min-Signal
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The minimum output value, which shall correspond with the minimum value of the
5208
5222
output range, must be entered here. This parameter is only active, if
5236 parameter 5201 on page 174 is configured to "user defined".
5250
Example: If the value configured here is 25 %, the maximum output range of +/-
20 mA / +/-10 V has a lower limit of -10 mA / -5 V.
User defined max. output value Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 4]: User defined maximum output value 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum output value, which shall correspond with the maximum value of
5209
5223
the output range, must be entered here. This parameter is only active, if
5237 parameter 5201 on page 174 is configured to "user defined".
5251
Example: If the value configured here is 75 %, the maximum output range of +/-
20 mA / +/-10 V has a upper limit of 10 mA / 5 V.
PWM Signal
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On................. A PWM signal will be output on the respective analog output. The
5202 amplitude of the PWM signal to be utilized is configured in "PWM
5216
output level" (parameter 5210 on page 175). If a PWM signal is
used, a jumper must be installed (refer to the wiring diagram in
manual 37426). The PWM signal will also be limited by
parameter 5201 on page 174 or parameters 5208 and 5209 on
page 175 if parameter 5201 is user defined.
Off ................ An analog signal will be output on the respective analog output.
PWM output level Analog output {x} [x = 1 to 2]: PWM output level 0.00 to 10.00 V
EN
PWM Ausgangslevel
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If PWM has been enabled in parameter 5203 on page 174, the level of the PWM
5210
5224
signal may be adjusted here.
NOTE
All functions which are described in the following text, may be assigned by the LogicsManager to any
relay that is available via the LogicsManager and not assigned to another function.
Start/Stop Modus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Diesel or gas engine start/stop logic must be selected. The starting sequences are
3321 described in the following sections. If this parameter is configured to "External" the
start/stop sequence must be done externally.
Engine: Diesel Engine
Start sequence
The relay "Preglow" will be energized for the preheating time period ("Preglow" is displayed). Following
preheating, the fuel solenoid is first energized and then the starter is engaged ("Start" is displayed). When the
configured firing speed is exceeded, the starter is disengaged and the fuel solenoid remains energized via the
firing speed. "Ramp to rated" is displayed until the engine monitoring delay timer expires and the start
sequence has finished.
If the engine fails to start, a start pause is initiated ("Start - Pause" is displayed). If the number of
unsuccessful start attempts reaches the configured value, an alarm message will be issued ("Start fail" is
displayed).
Stop sequence
After opening the GCB, the coasting time starts and the engine runs without load ("Cool down" is displayed).
On termination of the coasting time, the fuel solenoid is de-energized, and the engine is stopped ("Stop
engine" is displayed). If the engine cannot be stopped via the fuel solenoid, the alarm message "Eng. stop
malfunct." is displayed.
Start/stop diagram
The formula signs and indices mean:
tPRE ............... Auxiliary services prerun ................. [s] (parameter 3300 on page 186)
tPH ................. Preglow time .................................... [s] (parameter 3308 on page 177)
tST ................. Starter time ....................................... [s] (parameter 3306 on page 182)
tSP ................. Start pause ........................................ [s] (parameter 3307 on page 182)
tED................. Engine delayed monitoring .............. [s] (parameter 3315 on page 184)
tPOST .............. Auxiliary services postrun ................ [s] (parameter 3301 on page 186)
tCD ................ Cool down time ................................ [s] (parameter 3316 on page 185)
tGS ................. Generator stable time ....................... [s] (parameter 3415 on page 151)
EN
Vorglühzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Prior to each start, the diesel engine is preheated for this time (if a "0" has been
3308 configured here the engine will be started without preglow). The display indicates
"Preglow".
Vorglühmodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter dictates if and under what conditions a diesel engine is preheated.
3347
Off ................ The diesel engine is never preheated before a start attempt.
Always ......... Before a start attempt the "Preheating" relay is always energized for
the preglow time (parameter 3308). After that a start attempt is
initiated.
Analog ......... A preglow sequence is initiated if the monitored analog input
temperature (coolant temperature) is below the configured threshold
(parameter 3309). The preglow sequence is enabled for the
configured preglow time (parameter 3308). After that a start attempt
is initiated.
Vorglühen Kriterium
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The preglow criterion may be selected from the available data sources. Use the
3346 and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your selection
with the softkey. Refer to Appendix C on page 305 for a list of all data sources.
Usually, a temperature measuring is selected here, which is measured via a sensor.
Preglow temperature threshold Diesel engine: Preglow temperature threshold -10 to 250 °C
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the temperature threshold, which must be exceeded to prevent a preheating
3309 process, if parameter 3347 has been configured to "Analog".
[RPM]
Rated speed
[1/min; RPM]
Start frequency
f control + time
Firing speed
t [s]
Start request
t [s]
Auxiliary services
tPOST
t [s]
Preglow tPH tSP
t [s]
Starter 0.5 s tST 0.5 s
tST
t [s]
Fuel relay
t [s]
Engine tED
monitoring ON
t [s]
© Woodward
easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
Start sequence
Function: The starter is engaged ("Turning" is displayed). Following the expiration of the firing delay time
and if the engine is rotating with at least the configured "minimum speed for ignition", the ignition is switched on
("Ignition" is displayed). Following the expiration of the gas valve delay, the gas valve is then enabled
("Start" is displayed). If the configured firing speed is exceeded, the starter is disengaged. The gas valve and
the ignition remain enabled via the firing speed. "Ramp to rated" is displayed until the engine monitoring
delay timer expires and the start sequence has finished.
If the configured "minimum speed for ignition" is not reached, a start pause is initiated ("Start - Pause" is
displayed) before the next start attempt.
Stop sequence
Function: After opening the GCB, the coasting time starts and the engine runs without load ("Cool down" is
displayed). On termination of the coasting time, the gas valve is closed or de-energized, and the engine is stopped
("Stop engine" is displayedy). If the engine cannot be stopped, the alarm message "Eng. stop
malfunct." is displayed. If no speed is detected anymore, the ignition remains active for 5 seconds so that the
remaining gas is able to combust.
CAUTION
It is imperative to connect an emergency stop circuit to discrete input DI 1 to be able to perform an
emergency stop by disabling the ignition in case the gas valve fails to close.
Start/stop diagram
The formula signs and indices mean:
tPRE ................ Auxiliary services prerun ............... [s] (parameter 3300 on page 186)
tST ................. Starter time .................................... [s] (parameter 3306 on page 182)
tSP.................. Start pause...................................... [s] (parameter 3307 on page 182)
tID .................. Ignition delay ................................. [s] (parameter 3310 on page 179)
tGD ................. Gas delay ....................................... [s] (parameter 3311 on page 179)
tED ................. Engine delayed monitoring ............ [s] (parameter 3315 on page 184)
tPOST .............. Auxiliary services postrun ............. [s] (parameter 3301 on page 186)
tCD ................. Cool down time ............................. [s] (parameter 3316 on page 185)
tIC .................. Ignition coasting ("post burning") . [s] (fixed to 5 seconds)
tGS ................. Generator stable time ..................... [s] (parameter 3415 on page 151)
Zündverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} With gas engines often a purging operation is desired before starting. With the
3310 engaging of the starter the ignition delay is started. The display indicates
"Turning". If the "Minimum speed for ignition" is reached after the expiration of
this time, the ignition is energized.
Gas valve delay Gas engine: Gas valve delay [tGD] 0 to 999 s
EN
Gasverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} By energizing the ignition relay the gas valve delay is started ("Ignition" is
3311
displayed). After the time set here has expired, and as long as the speed is higher
than the minimum speed for ignition, the gas valve is enabled for the time
configured in parameter 3306 "Starter time" ("Start" is displayed). Once the
ignition speed has been reached, the gas valve remains opened. If the speed falls
below ignition speed, the gas valve will be closed and the "Ignition" relay is de-
energized 5 seconds later.
Minimum speed for ignition Gas engine: Minimum speed for ignition 10 to 1.800 RPM
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} After expiration of the ignition delay the number of revolutions set here must be
3312 reached, so the "Ignition" relay will be energized.
[RPM]
Rated speed
[1/min; RPM]
Minimum speed for ignition
will not be reached
Firing speed
Minimum speed
for ignition
t [s]
Start request
t [s]
Auxiliary services
tPRE tPOST
t [s]
Ignition tID tIC
t [s]
Starter tSP tST
tID
t [s]
Gas valve
t [s]
Engine tED
monitoring ON
t [s]
© Woodward
easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
© Woodward
Manual 37427
Rated speed
Firing speed
[1/min; RPM]
Minimum speed
for ignition
Start request
Auxiliary services
tPRE
Engine
monitoring ON
unsuccessf. unsuccessful
easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
Page 181/339
Figure 3-22: Start /stop sequence - gas engine - unsuccessful
Manual 37427 easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
Anzahl Startversuche
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The control will attempt to start the engine with this number of start attempts. If
3302 the engine fails to start after the configured number of attempts, an alarm will be
initiated. An engine has been successfully started if the ignition speed reaches the
configured firing speed and the delayed engine monitoring has expired.
Start attempts critical mode Start alarm: Number of starting attempts in critical mode 1 to 20
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If a critical operation mode (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Critical
4102 Mode (Sprinkler Operation, LogicsManager) on page 210) is initiated, the engine
will continue to attempt to start for the number of starts configured here. An
engine has been successfully started if the ignition speed reaches the configured
firing speed and the delayed engine monitoring has expired.
Einrückzeit Anlasser
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the maximum time that the starter relay will remain energized ("Start"
3306
display). If the LogicsManager output "Ignition speed reached" = TRUE, the
speed/frequency have reached firing speed, or the time has expired, the relay will
be de-energized.
Startpausenzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the delay time between the individual starting attempts. This time is also
3307
used to protect the starter relay. The message "Start - Pause" is displayed.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} During this time a restart of the engine is blocked. This time should be configured
3326 so that the engine is total shutdown to protect the starting circuit. Once speed from
the engine is no longer detected the time configured in this parameter is initiated.
The message "Stop engine" is displayed. The LogicsManager command
variable "Stop solenoid" (03.27) becomes TRUE as soon as the stop signal has
been issued and remains true until this timer has expired.
t [s]
t [s]
t [s]
tED
[1/min; RPM]
Delayed engine
Firing speed
[RPM]
Rated speed
Ignition speed
Start request
monitoring
reached
NOTE
When the ignition speed is reached, the starter is disengaged under one of the following conditions:
• The measurement via MPU is enabled (On):
Ignition speed is detected
Ignition speed (measured via the generator voltage) is detected
Conditions for "Ignition speed" (see LogicsManager) equal true.
• The measurement via MPU is disabled (Off):
Ignition speed (measured via the generator voltage) is detected
Conditions for "Ignition speed" (see LogicsManager) equal true.
Zünddrehzahl
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} After firing speed has been reached, the starter is disengaged and the time counter
3313 for the engine delayed monitoring is activated. The firing speed is to be configured
low enough that it is always exceeded during regular generator operation.
LogicsManager for firing speed Engine: Firing speed via LogicsManager Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The engine firing speed is additionally monitored by the
3324 LogicsManager.
No ................ The firing speed is measured by the speed/frequency input (MPU),
not via the LogicsManager.
Zünddrehzahl
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This screen is only visible if parameter 3324 is configured to Yes.
12500 Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the ignition speed
will be recognized as above minimum limit (e.g. via an oil pressure switch). The
LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
After reaching the firing speed, the engine delayed monitoring timer is started. Upon expiration of this timer all
"engine delayed monitoring" configured alarms and discrete inputs will be enabled.
Verzög. Motorüberwach.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Delay between reaching the firing speed and activation of the monitoring of engine
3315 speed delayed alarms (i.e. underspeed).
This timer should be configured in such a manner that it corresponds to the starting time of the engine plus any
possible startup transients. A GCB closure may take place after the expiration of this timer. Note: The GCB
closure can be initiated prior to engine delayed monitoring by configuring the LogicsManager "Undelay close
GCB" (parameter 12210 on page 151).
EN
Motor Nachlaufzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Regular stop: If the engine performs a normal stop (start request is disabled or
3316
change into STOP operating mode) or a stop caused by an alarm of alarm class
C/D, a cool down with an opened GCB is carried out. This time is programmable.
The message "Cool down" is displayed and the LogicsManager command
variable 04.10 becomes TRUE.
Stop by a class 'C' or 'D' alarm: If the engine is stopped by an alarm of this alarm
class, a cool down is carried out with an opened GCB. This time is programmable.
Stop by a class 'E' or 'F' alarm: If the engine is stopped by an alarm of this alarm
class, the engine is shutdown without a cool down immediately.
NOTE
If a critical operation mode (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Critical Mode (Sprinkler
Operation, LogicsManager) on page 210) is initiated, the time configured in critical mode postrun
(parameter 4109) will be used instead of the cool down time.
Cool down in STOP mode Engine: Cool down time in STOP mode Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... A cool down will be performed if the genset is changed to STOP
3319 operation mode.
No ................. No cool down will be performed if the genset is changed to STOP
operation mode.
Cool down without breaker Engine: Cool down without breaker Yes / No
EN
Nachlauf ohne LS
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter may be used to perform a cool down if the aplication mode
3322 --- --- (parameter 3401 on page 139) is configured to "None" or "GCB open".
Yes ............... A cool down will be performed if a start signal is disabled or a stop
signal is enabled.
No ................. No cool down will be performed if a start signal is disabled or a stop
signal is enabled.
Start command
tPRE
LogicsManager 03.30
Auxiliary services prerun
Motor stop
LogicsManager 03.01
engine stop
engine start
Auxiliary services
tPOST
LogicsManager 03.31
Auxiliary services postrun
Engine speed
Figure 3-24: Engine - Auxiliary services timing
Auxiliary services prerun Engine: Prerun auxiliary operation (start preparation) [tPRE] 0 to 999 s
EN
Hilfsbetriebe Vorlauf
DE
Prior to a start sequence being initiated, the discrete output for the auxiliary services
prerun (LogicsManager 03.30) remains enabled for the configured amount of time
to permit engine related operations (i.e. open louvers) to be performed. While this
discrete output is enabled the control screen will display the message
"Aux.serv.prerun" for the configured time.
The auxiliary services discrete output disables when the operation mode is changed
from the MANUAL operation mode or, if engine speed is no longer detected, when
the discrete output for the auxiliary services postrun (LogicsManager 03.31) is
disabled.
Auxiliary services postrun Engine: Coasting auxiliary operation (post operation) [tPOST] 0 to 999 s
EN
Hilfsbetriebe Nachlauf
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} After each engine stop (the engine stop timer has expired), the discrete output for
3301 the auxiliary services postrun (LogicsManager 03.31) remains energized for an
adjustable time (i.e. operate a cooling pump). If the operating mode is changed
from MANUAL to STOP or AUTOMATIC without a start command the relay
remains energized for this period of time. The message "Aux.serv.postrun"
will be displayed on the control unit screen. In the "MANUAL" operating mode
this relay output is not used.
To configure the MPU input, the Number of teeth on the flywheel detected by the magnetic pick up (MPU) or the
number of pickup pulses per revolution of the engine must be configured:
Pickup
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ Speed monitoring of the engine is carried out by the MPU.
1600 Off ................ Speed/frequency monitoring of the generator set (the engine) is
performed by measuring the frequency of the generator. There is no
MPU wired to this unit.
Anzahl Pickup-Zähne
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Number of pulse per revolution/teeth on the flywheel.
1602
Table 3-89 shows the speed measuring range for various flywheel teeth numbers (parameter 1602) and rated
speeds (parameter 1601 on page 37) for a minimum signal voltage of 2 V.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the engine will be
12570 operated in idle mode automatically for the configured time during start-up.
Monitoring is limited as described above. This function may always be configured
to "1" for example. The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on
page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the engine will
12550 be continuously operated in idle mode. Monitoring is limited as described above. A
key switch via a DI may be configured here for example. The LogicsManager and
its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Automatic idle time Engine: Time for automatic idle mode 1 to 9999 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The automatic idle mode is active for the time configured here. Monitoring is
3328 limited as described above during this time.
During emergency / critical Engine: Idle mode possible during emergency / critical operation Yes / No
EN
Während Notstrom/Sprinkler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... If an emergency or critical operation is enabled, the engine will go to
3329 rated speed only after completing the configured idle mode.
No ................ If an emergency or critical operation is enabled, no idle run will be
performed the engine will go directly to rated speed.
NOTE
The normal operation monitoring limits will be enabled again, if one of the following conditions is
fulfilled:
• Idle mode has ended and generator frequency and voltage are within the operating range of the
generator (refer to
• Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48).
• Idle mode has ended and engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 on page 184) has expired.
NOTE
The flexible limits 13 through 16 are disabled during idle mode operation (refer to Configure
Monitoring: Flexible Limits on page 119).
Page 188/339 © Woodward
Manual 37427 easYgen-2000 Series - Genset Control
NOTE
The emergency power operation is possible only in application mode {2oc} (2 power circuit breakers).
If the LogicsManager outputs 'Stop request in AUTO' or 'Inhibit emergency run' are TRUE, an
emergency power operation may be prevented or interrupted from an external source.
Prerequisite: The emergency power function can only be activated for synchronous generators with
parameter 2802. Emergency power is carried out in operating mode AUTOMATIC regardless of the status of the
LogicsManager output 'Start request in AUTO' (LogicsManager).
• If an emergency power operation is initiated, the engine is started automatically, unless the start sequence is
interrupted via an alarm or prevented via the LogicsManager or the operating mode is changed.
• The GCB can be closed regardless of the engine delay time if the generator frequency and voltage are within
the configured operating limits (refer to Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on
page 48) if the parameter "Undelay close GCB" (parameter 12210 on page 151) has been set accordingly
(default setting).
• If the mains return during an emergency power operation (GCB is closed), the mains settling time
(parameter 2801 on page 83) must expire before the load is transferred from the generator to mains operation.
Activation of emergency power: If the mains are not within the configured frequency and voltage operating
limits (refer to Configure Monitoring: Mains, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 83) for at least the time
configured in the parameter "Mains fail delay time" (parameter 2800), an emergency power operation is
activated.
MCB malfunction: An emergency power operation will be performed, if the control is not able to close or
recluse the MCB and the alarm "Fail to close MCB" occurs.
Mains rotation field alarm: If the mains returns after a mains failure with a reversed rotation direction the
generator remains in emergency power operation until the mains rotation matches the rotation of the generator
set.
NOTE
The generator will not start upon a mains rotation field alarm, but it will keep on running if it has
already started.
Ein/Aus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ If the unit is in the AUTOMATIC operating mode and a mains fault
2802 --- --- --- occurs according to the following parameters, the engine is started
and an automatic emergency operation is carried out.
Off................ No emergency operation is carried out.
Mains fail delay time Emergency power: Mains failure: Start delay 0.00 to 99.99 s
EN
Startverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} To start the engine and to carry out an emergency operation the monitored mains
2800 --- --- --- must be failed continuously for the minimum period of time set with this
parameter. This delay time starts only if the easYgen is in AUTOMATIC operating
mode and emergency power is activated.
Emerg. start with MCB failure Emergency power: Emergency operation by MCB failure Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Emergency power operations may be configured with the failure of the MCB in
3408 --- --- --- addition to a loss of power on the mains supply. An MCB breaker alarm is
indicated if parameter "MCB monitoring" (parameter 2620 on page 117) is
configured "On".
Kein Notstrombetrieb
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the emergency
12200 --- --- --- power operation will be terminated or blocked. The LogicsManager and its default
settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Break emerg. in critical mode Emergency power: Override emergency operations in critical mode 0 to 999 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The emergency power operations are overridden for the configured time when the
4101 --- --- --- critical mode starts in order to supply the complete generator power to the sprinkler
pump.
• a discrete input
• a temperature level
• an interface start condition
• a start request from the LDSS function
• a timer
• any logical combination
If this logical output becomes TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating mode, the generator starts and the GCB will be
closed. The simultaneous activation of other LogicsManager outputs (e.g. Stop req. in Auto) may affect this
function.
The breaker handling depends on the configured application mode and breaker logic.
NOTE
Refer to Figure 3-25 and Priority Hierarchy of the Logical Outputs on page 275 for the priority of the
logical outputs in case that more than one logical output is TRUE.
Startanf. in Auto
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the control issues a
12120
start request in AUTOMATIC mode. The LogicsManager and its default settings
are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Stopanf. in Auto
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the control issues a
12190 stop request in AUTOMATIC mode. The LogicsManager and its default settings
are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Load-dependent start
LM 00.38: Critical mode start (with closed GCB – parameter ID 4100 = YES)
Engine
LM 00.38: Critical mode start (without closed GCB – parameter ID 4100 = NO) start
Refer to Appendix G: LDSS Formulas on page 332 for all formulas related with the LDSS function.
Load-dependent start/stop may either be performed according to a system reserve power or the generator load
depending on the configuration of the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 on page 196).
If the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 on page 196) is configured to "Reserve power", load-dependent start
stop is performed in a way that a configured minimum reserve power is maintained in the system. This means
that there is always enough reserve power for load swings on the busbar regardless of the generator load. The
actual reserve power in the system is the total rated power of all gensets on the busbar minus the actual total
generator real power.
This functionality provides high system reliability and is intended for applications that require a dedicated reserve
power on the busbar, independent of the number of gensets on the busbar.
Isolated Operation
If the reserve power falls below the IOP reserve power threshold (parameter 5760), another genset will be added.
PReserve < PReserveIOP
If the reserve power exceeds the IOP reserve power threshold (parameter 5760) plus the hysteresis
(parameter 5761) plus the rated load of the genset, the genset will be stopped. The hysteresis is intended to
prevent frequent starting and stopping of gensets in case of small load variations.
If the required generator load set point for the control at the mains interchange point exceeds the MOP minimum
load threshold (parameter 5767), the first genset will be added.
If at least one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the reserve power falls below the reserve
power threshold (parameter 5768), another genset will be added.
If at least two gensets are supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the reserve power exceeds the MOP
reserve power threshold (parameter 5768) plus the hysteresis (parameter 5769) plus the rated load of the genset,
the genset will be stopped. The hysteresis is intended to prevent frequent starting and stopping of gensets in case
of small load variations.
If one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the generator load exceeds the MOP minimum
load threshold (parameter 5767) minus the hysteresis (parameter 5769), the genset will be stopped. The hysteresis
is intended to prevent frequent starting and stopping of gensets in case of small load variations.
PMN setpoint – PMN real + PGN real active < PMOP minimum – Physteresis MOP
If the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 on page 196) is configured to "Generator load", load-dependent start
stop is performed in a way that the next genset will be started if all gensets in operation reach the maximum
generator load (parameter 5762 or 5770 "IOP/MOP Max. generator load"), a configured percentage (e.g. 80°%)
of the rated power. In order to stop one generator, the load of all gensets in operation must fall below the
minimum generator load (parameter 5763 or 5771 "IOP/MOP Min. generator load"), a configured percentage
(e.g. 30°%) of the rated power. There are different set points for isolated and mains parallel operation.
An additional dynamic parameter (parameter 5757 or 5758 "IOP/MOP Dynamic") prevents the gensets from
being started and stopped continusouly if only a few gensets are in operation. Refer to the description of the
dynamic parameters for detailed information.
This function provides an easy calculation for the start of the next genset.
Isolated Operation
If the configured maximum generator capacity utilization is exceeded, another genset will be added.
PGN real active > Pmax. load isolated
If the configured minimum generator capacity utilization has been fallen below, a genset will be stopped
depending on the dynamic setting. (refer to parameter 5757 on page 203 for detailed information).
PGN real active < Pmin. load isolated
If at least one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the total generator load exceeds the
MOP maximum generator load threshold (parameter 5770), another genset will be added.
PGN real active > Pmax. load parallel
If at least two gensets are supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the configured minimum generator
capacity utilization has been fallen below, a genset will be stopped depending on the dynamic setting. (refer to
parameter 5758 on page 207 for detailed information)
PGN real active < Pmin. load parallel
If one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and the generator load exceeds the MOP minimum
load threshold (parameter 5767) minus the hysteresis (parameter 5769), the genset will be stopped. The hysteresis
is intended to prevent frequent starting and stopping of gensets in case of small load variations.
PMN setpoint – PMN real + PGN real active < PMOP minimum – Physteresis MOP
If a genset is to be started, the genset with the highest priority configured will be started. If a genset is to be
stopped, the genset with the lowest priority configured will be stopped. If all gensets have the same priority, the
next genset is selected according to the size of engine, i.e. the genset combination, which allows an optimum
efficiency will be used. If all gensets have the same rated load or this parameter is disabled, the remaining hours
until the next maintenance are considered. If these are also the same, the genset with the lowest generator number
will be started first or stopped last.
Priority order:
The load-dependent start/stop function requires the following conditions have been met:
• The control has been placed in AUTOMATIC operating mode
• A start request (Start req. in AUTO, Emergency run) is active
• All load sharing parameters are configured identically for all generators participating in load sharing (refer to
Configure Monitoring: Miscellaneous, Multi-Unit on page 135)
• The mains interchange load control (import/export power) has been enabled or the gensets are in isolated
operation
• The conditions of the LogicsManager function "Load-dependent start/stop" have been fulfilled
Lastabh. Zu/Abs.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-dependent
12930 start/stop function is enabled. The LogicsManager and its default settings are
explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Start stop mode Load-dependent start stop: Start stop mode Reserve power / Generator load
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Reserve power .. Load-dependent start stop is performed in a way that a configured
5752 minimum reserve power is maintained in the system. The reserve
power is the total generator rated power minus the total actual
generator power. If the reserve power falls below the threshold,
another genset will be started. If the reserve power is sufficient to
stop one genset without falling below the threshold, a genset will be
stopped.
Generator load . Load-dependent start stop is performed in a way that a configured
maximum generator capacity utilization is not exceeded. If the
generator capacity utilization exceeds this threshold, another genset
will be started. If the generator capacity utilization is low enough to
stop one genset without exceeding the threshold again, a genset will
be stopped.
Dead busbar start mode Load-dependent start stop: Dead busbar start mode All / LDSS
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} All ................ All available gensets will be started in case of a dead busbar and
5753 remain connected to the busbar for the minimum running time
(parameter 5759). Then the gensets will be stopped according to the
configured LDSS procedure. The start delay is configured in
parameter 2800 (Mains fail delay time).
LDSS ........... The start of the gensets will be performed according to the
configured LDSS priority in case of a dead busbar.
EN
Grund Priorität
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The priority of the genset in the load-dependent start/stop network is configured
5751 with this parameter (refer to Configure Application: Automatic, Load-Dependent
Start/Stop: Generator Selection on page 195). The lower the number configured
here, the higher the priority. This priority may be overridden by the LDSS Priority
parameters (parameters 12924, 12925, and 12926).
LZA Priorität 2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-dependent
12926 start/stop priority will be set to 2 (the highest priority is valid). The LogicsManager
and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
LZA Priorität 3
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-
12925 dependent start/stop priority will be set to 3 (the highest priority is valid). The
LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
LZA Priorität 4
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-
12924 dependent start/stop priority will be set to 4 (the highest priority is valid). The
LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
Fit size of engine Load-dependent start stop: Fit size of engine Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines whether the start/stop priority order (refer to Configure
5754 Application: Automatic, Load-Dependent Start/Stop: Generator Selection on
page 195) considers the size of the engine (generator rated power) or not. In case
of different sized gensets, the control can start a genset combination which results
in optimum efficiency. The fuel efficiency may be optimized when this parameter
is enabled. This parameter may be disabled if all generators have the same size.
Yes ............... The priority order considers the engine size for the start of the next
engine for gensets with the same priority.
No ................ The priority order does not consider the rated power of the engines
to fit the best size of engines.
Fit service hours Load-dependent start stop: Fit service hours Off / Staggered / Equal
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Off ................ The remaining hours until the next service is required are not
5755 considered when evaluating the engines to be started.
Staggered ..... The remaining hours until the next service is required are
considered when evaluating the engines to be started for gensets
with same priority. The gensets are utilized in a way that the
maintenance may be performed at different times to ensure that not
all gensets have a downtime due to a maintenance at the same time.
The genset with the lowest hours until the next service will be
started first.
Equal ............ The remaining hours until the next service is required are
considered when evaluating the engines to be started for gensets
with same priority. The gensets are utilized in a way that the
maintenance may be performed at the same time for all gensets.
The genset with the highest hours until the next service will be
started first.
Changes of engines Load-dependent start stop: Changes of engines Off / All 32h / All 64h / All 128h
EN
Aggregatewechsel
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if fit service hours (parameter 5755) is
5756 configured to "Equal".
Engine sequencing may be configured to start and stop engines according to the
time remaining until the maintenance hours counter (parameter 2550) expires
(counter reaches 0 hrs). The easYgen-2000 Series takes the time remaining on the
maintenance hours counter and divides it by the service hours group
(32/64/128 h) configured in this parameter to determine the individual unit’s time
group. A generator with a larger time group number has more time remaining
before the maintenance hours timer expires and is considered to be the higher
priority generator. If two generators are in the same time group, the configured
generator number determines which generator is the higher priority and will be
started first. This functionality enables the end user to have multiple generators
due for service at approximately the same time.
The time group for generator 1 is calculated as: 262h/64h = 4.09 = Time group 4
The time group for generator 2 is calculated as: 298h/64h = 4.66 = Time group 4
Both generators are in time group 4. Time group 4 consists of any generator that
the time group calculation total ranges from 4.00 through 4.99. In this instance
the assigned generator number is used to determine which generator is brought
online. Generator 1 will be started.
The time group for generator 1 is calculated as: 262h/64h = 4.09 = Time group 4
The time group for generator 2 is calculated as: 345h/64h = 5.39 = Time group 5
The time group for generator 3 is calculated as: 298h/64h = 4.66 = Time group 4
Generators 1 and 3 are in time group 4. Time group 4 consists of any generator
that the time group calculation total ranges from 4.00 through 4.99. Generator 2 is
in time group 5. Time group 5 consists of any generator that the time group
calculation total ranges from 5.00 through 5.99. In this instance the largest time
group will determine which generator is brought online. Generator 2 will be
started because it is in time group 5.
Minimum running time Load-dependent start stop: Minimum running time 0 to 32000 s
EN
Aggregate Mindestlaufzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If a genset has been started by the LDSS function, it continues to operate at least
5759 for this time even if it would have been stopped before. This timer is started with
the closure of the GCB. If an emergency run is active (refer to Configure
Application: Configure Emergency Run on page 189) and the mains return, this
timer will be overridden and the load is transferred back to the mains after the
mains settling time (parameter 2801 on page 83) has expired.
In case of an isolated parallel operation (MCB open), the first genset will be connected to the de-energized
busbar. At least one genset must be in operation in isolated operation. There are dedicated LDSS parameters for
isolated parallel operation because the supply of the load is important here.
IOP Reserve power Load-dependent start stop: IOP Reserve power 0 to 999999 kW
EN
IPB Reserveleistung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5760 configured to "Reserve power".
The value configured for the reserve power determines when an additional
generator will be started. The reserve power is the desired spinning reserve of a
generator or generators. The reserve power is usually estimated as the largest load
swing that a power plant may encounter during the time it takes to bring an
additional generator online. The available generator power is calculated by adding
up the generator real power ratings of all generators with closed GCBs. The reserve
generator power is calculated by subtracting the power currently being produced by
all generators with closed GCBs from the total available generator power. If the
actual reserve power of the generators is less than the value configured in this
parameter, the next generator will be started.
IPB Hysterese
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5761 configured to "Reserve power".
If the reserve power is sufficient to stop one genset without falling below the
threshold and the hysteresis configured here, a genset will be stopped.
IOP Max. generator load Load-dependent start stop: IOP Maximum generator load 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5762 configured to "Generator load".
If the generator load exceeds the threshold configured here, the load-dependent
start/stop function will start another genset.
IOP Min. generator load Load-dependent start stop: IOP Minimum generator load 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5763 configured to "Generator load".
If the generator load falls below the threshold configured here, the load-dependent
start/stop function will stop a genset. If only a few gensets are operating in a multi-
genset application, the IOP Dynamic (parameter 5757 on page 203) will also be
considered when stopping a genset.
NOTE
The maximum generator load must be configured higher then the minimum generator load for proper
operation.
IOP Dynamic Load-dependent start stop: IOP Dynamic Low / Moderate / High
EN
IPB Dynamik
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5757 configured to "Generator load".
The dynamic determines when to start or stop the next genset and shows the
following behavior:
Starting a genset:
The Dynamic is only considered for the start sequence if "Fit size of engines" is
enabled (refer to parameter 5754). The control requests a certain amount of
additional load depending on the dynamic. It may start two or more gensets to
supply the required load. Also refer to the following example.
Low .............. A larger genset is requested and it will take longer until the next
change is required. The engines are operated with more reserve
power.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 25 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
Moderate ..... A medium genset is requested.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 50 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
High ............. A smaller genset is requested to operate the engines with higher
efficiency. This may lead to more frequent starts and stops.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 75 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping a genset:
The dynamic determines how soon a genset will be stopped. It prevents continuous
start and stop if only a few gensets are in operation. In this case, the remaining
gensets would not reach the maximum limit if one genset stops (if, for example,
two gensets with 100 kW rated load, a minimum load of 40 % and a maximum
load of 70 % are operated, the second genset will be shut down if both reach 40 kW
and the remaining engine would operate with 80 kW and request the next engine
and so on). The more gensets are running, the less the influence of this parameter.
Also refer to the following example.
Low .............. The genset will shut down at a lower limit and be operated longer.
The number of gensets in operation will remain constant for a wider
range of load.
The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 25 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
Moderate ..... The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 50 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
High ............. The genset will be shut down earlier. This may lead to more frequent
starts and stops.
The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 75 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
• If the dynamic is configured to Low, a total generator rated power of 294.7 kW is requested and a 100 kW
genset will be started.
• If the dynamic is configured to Moderate, a total generator rated power of 254.5 kW is requested and a
100 kW genset will be started.
• If the dynamic is configured to High, a total generator rated power of 224.0 kW is requested and a 50 kW
genset will be started.
Refer to Appendix G: LDSS Formulas on page 332 for details about the formulas used for calculation.
Dynamic Load level before stopping Resulting load level for remaining engine
Low 23.75 % 47.5 % (25 % of the difference between 70 and 40 %)
Moderate 27.5 % 55 % (50 % of the difference between 70 and 40 %)
High 31.25 % 62.5 % (75 % of the difference between 70 and 40 %)
Table 3-97: Load-dependent start/stop - dynamic influence on stopping a genset
IOP Add on delay Load-dependent start stop: IOP Add on delay 0 to 32000 s
EN
IPB Zusetzverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Load swings may exceed the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the engine
5764 from starting due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be configured. The
LDSS criterion for adding load must be exceeded without interruption for this
delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a start command being issued. If the
LDSS criterion for adding load is fallen below before the delay time expires, the
delay time is reset and a start command is not issued.
IOP Add on delay at rated load Load-dependent start stop: IOP Add on delay at rated load 0 to 32000 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The command to start the next genset in case a genset exceeds rated load will be
5765 issued after the delay configured here has expired. This parameter becomes only
effective in case a genset exceeds rated load to achieve a faster start and overrides
parameter 5764.
IOP Add off delay Load-dependent start stop: IOP Add off delay 0 to 32000 s
EN
IPB Absetzverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Load swings may fall below the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
5766 engine from stopping due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be
configured. The load must remain below the hysteresis set point without
interruption for the delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a stop command
being issued. If the load exceeds the hysteresis set point before the delay time
expires, the delay time is reset and a stop command is not issued.
In case of a mains parallel operation (MCB closed), load-dependent start stop is only enabled, if the gensets
participates in load sharing at the interchange point (all participating gensets must be configured to the same set
point). A minimum load threshold must be exceeded to start the first genset, i.e. a genset will only be started if a
minimum load would be demanded from the generator. There are dedicated LDSS parameters for mains parallel
operation.
MOP Minimum load Load-dependent start stop: MOP Minimum load 0 to 65000 kW
EN
NPB Mindestlast
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} For the mains interchange (import/export) real power control to function, a
5767
minimum generator power set point value is required to start the first genset. In
many cases, it is desirable that the engine is prevented from starting unless the
generator will operate at a specific kW level or higher to ensure a reasonable
degree of efficiency.
Example: The mains interchange must reach a level that will permit an 80kW
generator to operate at a minimum load of 40kW prior to the engine starting.
NPB Hysterese
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The importance of this parameter depends on the setting of the start stop
5769 mode (parameter 5752).
Start stop mode configured to "Reserve power": If the reserve power is sufficient to
stop one genset without falling below the reserve power threshold and the
hysteresis configured here, a genset will be stopped.
If the generator load falls below the minimum load threshold minus the hysteresis
configured here, the last genset will be stopped.
MOP Reserve power Load-dependent start stop: MOP Reserve power 0 to 999999 kW
EN
NPB Reserveleistung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5768 configured to "Reserve power".
The minimum reserve power in mains parallel operation is configured here. This is
the maximum expected load swing on the busbar, which shall be supported by the
gensets. If the reserve power falls below this value, the load-dependent start/stop
function will start another genset.
MOP Max. generator load Load-dependent start stop: MOP Maximum generator load 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5770 configured to "Generator load".
If the generator load exceeds the threshold configured here, the load-dependent
start/stop function will start another genset.
MOP Min. generator load Load-dependent start stop: MOP Minimum generator load 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5771 configured to "Generator load".
If the generator load falls below the threshold configured here, the load-dependent
start/stop function will stop a genset. If only a few gensets are operating in a multi-
genset application, the MOP Dynamic (parameter 5758) will also be considered
when stopping a genset.
NOTE
The maximum generator load must be configured higher then the minimum generator load for proper
operation.
MOP Dynamic Load-dependent start stop: MOP Dynamic Low / Moderate / High
EN
NPB Dynamik
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752) is
5758 configured to "Generator load".
The dynamic determines when to start or stop the next genset and shows the
following behavior:
Starting a genset:
The Dynamic is only considered for the start sequence if "Fit size of engines" is
enabled (refer to parameter 5754). The control requests a certain amount of
additional load depending on the dynamic. It may start two or more gensets to
supply the required load.
Low .............. A larger genset is requested and it will take longer until the next
change is required. The engines are operated with more reserve
power.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 25 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
Moderate ..... A medium genset is requested.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 50 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
High ............. A smaller genset is requested to operate the engines with higher
efficiency. This may lead to more frequent starts and stops.
The requested load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded
with 75 % of the range between minimum and maximum generator
load (parameters 5762 & 5763) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping a genset:
The dynamic determines how soon a genset will be stopped. It prevents continuous
start and stop if only a few gensets are in operation. In this case, the remaining
gensets would not reach the maximum limit if one genset stops (if, for example,
two gensets with 100 kW rated load, a minimum load of 40 % and a maximum
load of 70 % are operated, the second genset will be shut down if both reach 40 kW
and the remaining engine would operate with 80 kW and request the next engine
and so on). The more gensets are running, the less the influence of this parameter.
Also refer to the following example.
Low .............. The genset will shut down at a lower limit and be operated longer.
The number of gensets in operation will remain constant for a wider
range of load.
The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 25 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
Moderate ..... The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 50 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
High ............. The genset will be shut down earlier. This may lead to more frequent
starts and stops.
The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 75 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 & 5763).
Refer to parameter 5757 on page 203 for examples on starting and stopping a
genset depending on the dynamic setting.
MOP Add on delay Load-dependent start stop: MOP Add on delay 0 to 32000 s
EN
NPB Zusetzverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Load swings may exceed the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
5772 engine from starting due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be
configured. The LDSS criterion for adding load must be exceeded without
interruption for this delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a start command
being issued. If the LDSS criterion for adding load is fallen below before the
delay time expires, the delay time is reset and a start command is not issued.
MOP Add on delay at rated load Load-dependent start stop: MOP Add on delay at rated load 0 to 32000 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The command to start the next genset in case a genset exceeds rated load will be
5773 issued after the delay configured here has expired. This parameter becomes only
effective in case a genset exceeds rated load to achieve a faster start and overrides
parameter 5772.
MOP Add off delay Load-dependent start stop: MOP Add off delay 0 to 32000 s
EN
NPB Absetzverzögerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Load swings may fall below the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
5774 engine from stopping due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be
configured. The load must remain below the hysteresis set point without
interruption for the delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a stop command
being issued. If the load exceeds the hysteresis set point before the delay time
expires, the delay time is reset and a stop command is not issued.
EN
Start ohne Übernahme
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE switching from mains to generator
12540 --- ---
supply following an engine start is prevented (the GCB close operation is blocked).
This function may be used to perform a test operation. If an emergency power case
occurs meanwhile, it is still possible to change to generator operation. If this
condition becomes TRUE in isolated operation, the GCB cannot be opened before
the MCB has been closed. The LogicsManager and its default settings are
explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Startup in mode Operating mode after applying the power supply STOP / AUTO / MAN / Last
EN
Einschalten in Betriebsart
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the controller is powered down, the unit will start in the following configured
1795 --- --- mode when it is powered up again.
NOTE
For the selection of the operating mode via the LogicsManager (if two different operating modes have
been selected simultaneously) the control unit will prioritize the modes as follows:
1. STOP
2. MANUAL
3. AUTOMATIC
Betriebsart AUTO
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the unit will change
12510 into operating mode AUTOMATIC. If AUTOMATIC mode is selected via the
LogicsManager it is not possible to change operating modes via the front panel.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix
B: "LogicsManager".
Betriebsart MAN
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the unit will change
12520 into operating mode MANUAL. If MANUAL mode is selected via the
LogicsManager it is not possible to change operating modes via the front panel.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix
B: "LogicsManager".
Betriebsart STOP
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the unit will change
12530 into operating mode STOP. If STOP mode is selected via the LogicsManager it is
not possible to change operating modes via the front panel. The LogicsManager
and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
Alarm classes
Normal operation A B C D E F
Critical mode A B B B B B
Critical mode "On"
A critical mode will be initiated/started once the critical mode operation LogicsManager output becomes TRUE
(logic "1"). The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the display screen. If the engine is not already
running, the controller will attempt to start the engine as configured (parameter 4102 on page 182). All shutdown
alarms become warning messages (see above).
Critical mode "Off"
A critical mode will be interrupted/stopped once critical mode operation LogicsManager output becomes FALSE
(logic "0") and the postrun time has expired. If the operation mode changes to STOP, this time will be considered
as expired. With termination of the critical mode, a normal cool down is performed.
NOTE
Refer to Priority Hierarchy of the Logical Outputs on page 275 for more information about the priorities
of the logical outputs.
M
Load
MCB GCB G
Figure 3-26: Automatic - Critical operation at busbar
NOTE
The GCB will not be closed if the load is supplied by the mains until the mains fail and the MCB
remains closed because emergency run (parameter 2802) is disabled.
Critical mode ends before mains recovery: The emergency power operation will be continued and all
shutdown alarms become active again. If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from generator supply to
mains supply after the mains settling delay expires.
Emergency power operation ends before the end of the critical mode: The critical mode is maintained and the
load is transferred from generator supply to mains supply after the mains settling delay expires. The engine
remains running until the conditions for the critical mode are no longer existent. If the genset was not running
before critical mode has been enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (parameter 3316) has expired.
The GCB will take on the same state as it has before the critical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode ends before mains recovery: The emergency power operation will be continued and all
shutdown alarms become active again. If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from generator supply to
mains supply after the mains settling delay expires, if Enable MCB (parameter 12923) has been enabled.
Emergency power operation ends before the end of the critical mode: The critical mode is maintained and the
load is transferred from generator supply to mains supply after the mains settling delay expires. The engine
remains running until the conditions for the critical mode are no longer existent. If the genset was not running
before critical mode has been enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (parameter 3316) has expired.
The GCB will take on the same state as it has before the critical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode ends before the start request is terminated: The engine continues running. All shutdown alarms
will become active again. By resetting the start request the GCB will be opened and the engine will be
stopped.
Start request will be terminated before the critical mode is terminated: The critical mode operation is
continued. The engine keeps running until the conditions for the critical mode are no longer fulfilled and all
shutdown alarms will become active again. If the genset was not running before critical mode has been
enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (parameter 3316) has expired. The GCB will take on the same
state as it has before the critical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode and start request: The generator is supplying load in automatic mode with closed GCB. If
critical mode is enabled, the "Critical mode" message is displayed on the display screen and all
shutdown alarms become warning alarms.
Load M
MCB GCB G
Figure 3-27: Automatic - Critical operation at generator
Critical mode ends before mains recovery: The emergency power operation will be continued and all
shutdown alarms become active again. If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from generator supply to
mains supply after the mains settling delay expires.
Emergency power operation ends before the end of the critical mode: The critical mode is maintained and the
load is transferred from generator supply to mains supply after the mains settling delay expires. The GCB will
be opened without unloading (transition mode interchange or parallel). If open transition mode is configured,
the GCB will not be opened to prevent a dead busbar. All shutdown alarms become active again. If the genset
was not running before critical mode has been enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time
(parameter 3316) has expired.
Critical mode ends before mains recovery: The emergency power operation will be continued and all
shutdown alarms become active again. If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from generator supply to
mains supply after the mains settling delay expires.
Emergency power operation ends before the end of the critical mode: The critical mode is maintained and the
load is transferred from generator supply to mains supply after the mains settling delay expires. The GCB will
be opened without unloading (transition mode interchange or parallel). All shutdown alarms become active
again. If the genset was not running before critical mode has been enabled, it will be stopped after cool down
time (parameter 3316) has expired.
Critical mode ends before the start request is terminated: The engine continues running and a change to
generator or parallel operation is performed. All shutdown alarms will become active again.
Start request will be terminated before the critical mode is terminated: The critical mode operation is
continued. The engine keeps running until the conditions for the critical mode are no longer fulfilled and all
shutdown alarms will become active again. If the genset was not running before critical mode has been
enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (parameter 3316) has expired. The GCB will take on the same
state as it has before the critical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode ends before the start request is terminated: The engine continues running and a change to
generator or parallel operation is performed. All shutdown alarms will become active again.
Start request will be terminated before the critical mode is terminated: The critical mode operation is
continued. The engine keeps running until the conditions for the critical mode are no longer fulfilled and all
shutdown alarms will become active again. If the genset was not running before critical mode has been
enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (parameter 3316) has expired.
Parameters
If this logical output becomes TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating mode, it starts the critical mode.
Sprinklerbetrieb
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in
12220 Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Sprinkler Nachlaufzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The critical mode operation is continued for the time configured here after the
4109
critical mode request has been terminated. The message "Cool down" is
displayed and the LogicsManager command variable 04.10 becomes TRUE.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... If a critical mode operation is detected the GCB will close.
4100 --- --- No ................ The GCB cannot be closed during a critical mode operation.
Override alarmcl. also in MAN Critical mode alarm classes active in MANUAL operating mode Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... The critical mode alarm classes will override the normal operation
4105 alarm classes when in MANUAL operation mode and the
LogicsManager output 12220 becomes TRUE.
No ................ The alarm classes will not be changed in the MANUAL operating
mode.
WARNING
The following parameters dictate how the easYgen-2000 Series controls voltage, frequency, load, and
power factor. It is vital that the correct setting be entered in these parameters. Failure to do so may
lead to incorrect measurements and failures within the control unit resulting in damage to or
destruction of the generator and/or personal injury or death.
Overview
The Real load, reactive load, and process control all utilize PID controllers. The response of each control loop
can be adjusted for optimum response, however it is important to understand what a PID controller is and the
effect of each controller adjustment has on the controller response. Proportional gain, integral gain (stability), and
DR (speed derivative ratio) are the adjustable and interacting parameters used to match the response of the
control loop with the response of the system. They correspond to the P (proportional), I (integral), and D
(derivative) terms, and are displayed in the easYgen as follows:
• P = Proportional gain (%)
• I = Integral gain (%)
• D = Derivative gain (determined by DR and I)
Proportional Control
Proportional response is directly proportional to a process change. [Analogy: Setting hand throttle to keep
constant speed on straight and level.]
Proportional control (using the same analogy) results in a certain speed as long as the car is not subjected to any
load change such as a hill. If a throttle is set to any particular setting, the speed of the car will remain constant as
long as the car remains straight and level. If the car goes up a hill it will slow down. Of course, going down a hill
the car would gain speed.
Integral Control
Integral compensates for process and set point load changes. [Analogy: Cruise control maintains constant speed
regardless of hills.]
Integral, sometimes called reset, provides additional action to the original proportional response as long as the
process variable remains away from the set point. Integral is a function of the magnitude and duration of the
deviation. In this analogy the reset response would keep the car speed constant regardless of the terrain.
Derivative
Derivative provides a temporary over-correction to compensate for long transfer lags and reduce stabilization
time on process upsets (momentary disturbances). The behavior of the derivative parameter is shown in Figure
3-28 on page 216. [Analogy: Accelerating into high speed lane with merging traffic.]
Derivative, sometimes called "preact" of "rate", is very difficult to draw an accurate analogy to, because the
action takes place only when the process changes and is directly related to the speed at which the process
changes. Merging into high speed traffic of a freeway from an "on" ramp is no easy task and requires accelerated
correction (temporary overcorrection) in both increasing and decreasing directions. The application of brakes to
fall behind the car in the first continuous lane or passing gear to get ahead of the car in the first continuous lane is
a derivative action.
1.00
0.01 100.00
If the system is unstable, make sure the governor is the cause. This can be checked by closing the valve limiter
until it has control of the actuator output. If the governor is causing the oscillation, time the oscillation cycle time.
A rule-of- thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is less than 1 second, reduce the Proportional gain term.
A rule-of-thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is greater than 1 second, reduce the Integral gain term
(proportional gain may need to be increased also).
On an initial startup with the easYgen-2000 Series, all PID dynamic gain terms will require adjustment to match
the respective PID’s response to that of its control loop. There are multiple dynamic tuning methods available
that can be used with the easYgen’s PIDs to assist in determining the gain terms that provide optimum control
loop response times.
The following method can be used to achieve PID gain values that are close to optimum:
1. Increase Derivative Ratio (DR) to 100.
2. Reduce integral gain to 0.01.
3. Increase proportional gain until system just starts to oscillate.
4. The optimum gain for this step is when the system just starts to oscillate and maintains a self-sustaining
oscillation that does not increase or decrease in magnitude.
5. Record the control gain (Kc) and oscillation period (T) in seconds.
6. Set the dynamics as follows:
• For PI control: G=P(I/s + 1)
• Set: Proportional gain = 0.45*Kc
• Integral gain = 1.2/T
• Derivative ratio = 100
• For PID control: G=P(I/s + 1 + Ds)
• Set: Proportional gain = 0.60*Kc
• Integral gain = 2/T
• Deriv ratio = 8/(T*Integral Gain) for feedback dominant
= (T*Integral Gain)/8 for input dominant
7. This method of tuning will get the gain settings close, they can be fine-tuned from this point.
Frequency Control Frequency control: activation PID analog / 3pos controller / Off
EN
Frequenzregler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} PID analog .. The frequency is controlled using an analog PID controller.
5507 3pos contr. ... The frequency is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off ................ Frequency control is not carried out.
Verstärkung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5510 configured to "PID analog".
The proportional coefficient specifies the gain. By increasing the gain, the response
is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be controlled. The farther
out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to return the process
to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the result is excessive
overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Integrierbeiwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5511 configured to "PID analog".
The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller. The integral gain
corrects for any offset (between set point and process variable) automatically over
time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset automatically changes the output
requirements until the process variable and the set point are the same. This
parameter permits the user to adjust how quickly the reset attempts to correct for
any offset. The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time
constant. If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually
oscillate. If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to
settle at a steady state.
Differenzierverhältnis
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5512 configured to "PID analog".
The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller. By increasing this
parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will attempt to
slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent excessive overshoot or
undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID
loop operates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.
Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5550 configured to "3pos controller".
Time pulse minimum Frequency control: time pulse minimum 0.01 to 2.00 s
EN
Impulsdauer Minimum
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5551 configured to "3pos controller".
A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible pulse
time should be configured to limit overshoot of the desired speed reference point.
Verstärkungsfaktor
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5552 configured to "3pos controller".
The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays. By increasing the
number configured in this parameter, the operating time of the relay will be in-
creased in response to a deviation from the frequency reference. By increasing the
gain, the response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be
controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action
is to return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Expand deadband factor Frequency control: expand deadband factor 1.0 to 9.9
EN
Aufweitung Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5553 configured to "3pos controller".
If the measured generator frequency is within the deadband range (parameter 5550)
and the configured delay expand deadband time (parameter 5554) expires, the
deadband will be multiplied with the factor configured here.
The following conditions are required for the kick impulse function:
• Frequency control (parameter 5507) is configured to "3pos controller"
• Synchronization mode (parameter 5728) is configured to "RUN" or "CHECK" (or "Controlled by LM" and
RUN or CHECK enabled by the LogicsManager)
Delay expand deadband Frequency control: delay expand deadband 1.0 to 9.9 s
EN
Verzögerung Aufweitung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507) is
5554 configured to "3pos controller".
The measured generator frequency must be within the deadband range for the time
configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor configured in
parameter 5553.
Frequency setpoint 1 source Frequency control: frequency setpoint 1 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The Frequency setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data sources.
5518 Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The frequency set point may be adjusted within the configured operating limits
(refer to Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on
page 48).
Int. freq. control setpoint 1 Frequency control: internal set point 1 15.00 to 85.00 Hz
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The internal generator frequency set point 1 is defined in this screen. This value is
5500 the reference for the frequency controller when performing isolated and/or no-load
operations. Generally 50 Hz or 60 Hz will be the values entered into this parameter.
It is possible to enter a different value here.
Frequency setpoint 2 source Frequency control: frequency setpoint 2 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The Frequency setpoint 2 source may be selected from the available data sources.
5519 Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The frequency set point may be adjusted within the operating limits (refer to
Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48).
Int. freq. control setpoint 2 Frequency control: internal set point 2 15.00 to 85.00 Hz
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The internal generator frequency set point 2 is defined in this screen. This value is
5501 the reference for the frequency controller when performing isolated and/or no-load
operations. Generally 50 Hz or 60 Hz will be the values entered into this parameter.
It is possible that a different value may be entered here.
Freq. Sollwert 2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency set point 2 will be
12918 enabled, i.e. the setting of parameter 5519 overrides the setting of parameter 5518.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix
B: "LogicsManager".
Start frequency control level Frequency control: start value 15.00 to 85.00 Hz
EN
Startwert
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The frequency controller is activated when the monitored generator frequency has
5516
exceeded the value configured in this parameter. This prevents the easYgen from
attempting to control the frequency while the engine is completing its start
sequence.
EN
Start Verzögerung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The frequency controller is enabled after the configured time for this parameter
5517 expires.
Freq. control set point ramp Frequency control: set point ramp 0.10 to 60.00 Hz/s
EN
Frequenzregler Rampe
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The different set point values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The slope
5503 of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the set point
value. The faster the change in the set point is to be carried out, the greater the
value entered here must be.
Frequenzregler Statik
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this control is to be operated on a generator in parallel with other generators and
5504 frequency control is enabled, a droop characteristic curve must be used. Each
generator in the system will require the same value to be configured for the droop
characteristic, so that when the system is stable the active power will be distributed
proportionally among all generators in relation to their rated power.
Freq.Statik akt.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency droop is enabled. The
12904 LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
NOTE
The active droop will also be sent to an ECU connected to the J1939 interface (CAN interface 2). This
information is independent from the breaker states or active controller (frequency or power controller).
Example
Rated power: 500 kW
Rated frequency set point: 50.0 Hz
Droop 5.0 %
Slip frequency setpoint offset Frequency control: slip frequency set point offset 0.00 to 0.50 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value is the offset for the synchronization to the busbar / utility. With this
5502 offset, the unit synchronizes with a positive slip.
Example:
If this parameter is configured to 0.10 Hz and the busbar/mains frequency is
50.00 Hz, the synchronization set point is 50.10 Hz.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The phase matching gain multiplies the setting of the proportional gain
5505 (parameter 5510 on page 217) for phase matching control.
Phase matching df-start Frequency control: phase matching df start 0.02 to 0.25 Hz
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Phase matching will only be enabled if the frequency difference between the
5506 systems to be synchronized is below the configured value.
Freq. control initial state Frequency control: initial state 0.0 to 100.0 %
EN
Frequenzregler Grundstellung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value entered for this parameter is the start reference point for the analog
5508 output to the speed controller. If the output to the speed control has been disabled,
the output will act as a control position reference point.
Load Control Load control: activation PID analog / 3pos controller / Off
EN
Wirkleistungsregler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} PID analog ... The generator load is controlled using an analog PID controller.
5525 3pos contr. ... The generator load is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off ................ Load control is not carried out.
Verstärkung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5513 configured to "PID analog".
The proportional coefficient specifies the gain. By increasing the gain, the
response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be controlled.
The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to
return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Integrierbeiwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5514 configured to "PID analog".
The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller. The integral gain
corrects for any offset (between set point and process variable) automatically over
time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset automatically changes the output
requirements until the process variable and the set point are the same. This
parameter permits the user to adjust how quickly the reset attempts to correct for
any offset. The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time
constant. If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually
oscillate. If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to
settle at a steady state.
Differenzierverhältnis
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5515 configured to "PID analog".
The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller. By increasing this
parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will attempt to
slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent excessive overshoot
or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID
loop operates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.
Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5560 configured to "3pos controller".
The generator load is controlled in such a manner, when paralleled with the
mains, so that the monitored load does not deviate from the configured load set
point by more than the value configured in this parameter without the controller
issuing a raise/lower signal to the speed control. This prevents unneeded wear on
the raise/lower relay contacts. The configured percentage for the dead band refers
to the generator rated active power (parameter 1752 on page 38).
Time pulse minimum Load control: time pulse minimum 0.01 to 2.00 s
EN
Impulsdauer Minimum
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5561 configured to "3pos controller".
A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible pulse
time should be configured to limit overshoot of the desired load reference point.
Verstärkungsfaktor
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5562 configured to "3pos controller".
The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays. By increasing the
number configured in this parameter, the operating time of the relay will be in-
creased in response to a deviation from the power reference. By increasing the
gain, the response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be
controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action
is to return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Expand deadband factor Load control: expand deadband factor 1.0 to 9.9
EN
Aufweitung Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5563 configured to "3pos controller".
If the measured generator load is within the deadband range (parameter 5560) and
the configured delay expand deadband time (parameter 5564) expires, the
deadband will be multiplied with the factor configured here.
Delay expand deadband Load control: delay expand deadband 1.0 to 9.9 s
EN
Verzögerung Aufweitung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525) is
5564 configured to "3pos controller".
The measured generator load must be within the deadband range for the time
configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor configured in
parameter 5563.
Load setpoint 1 source Load control: load setpoint 1 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The load setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data sources. Use the
5539 and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your selection
with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to Appendix
C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a different
data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The load set point may be adjusted between 0 and the configured load control
setpoint maximum (parameter 5523 on page 227).
Sollwert 1
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Import ......... The value entered for the import level shall always be supplied by the
5526 utility. All load swings are absorbed by the generator(s) provided the
load rating for the generator(s) is not exceeded. The generator will
always start when an import power operation is enabled.
Export.......... The value entered for the export level shall always be supplied to the
utility. All load swings are absorbed by the generator(s) provided the
load rating for the generator(s) is not exceeded. The generator will
always start when an export power operation is enabled.
Constant ...... The generator shall always supply the value entered for the constant
power level. All load swings are absorbed by the utility. The
generator will always start when a constant power (base load)
operation is enabled.
Int. load control setpoint 1 Load control: internal load control set point 1 0 to 9,999.9 kW
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The load set point 1 is defined in this screen. This value is the reference for the load
5520 controller when performing parallel operations.
Load setpoint 2 source Load control: load setpoint 2 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The load setpoint 2 source may be selected from the available data sources. Use the
5540 and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your selection
with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to Appendix
C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a different
data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The load set point may be adjusted between 0 and the configured load control
setpoint maximum (parameter 5523 on page 227).
Sollwert 2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Import ..........The value entered for the import level shall always be supplied by the
5527 utility. All load swings are absorbed by the generator(s) provided the
load rating for the generator(s) is not exceeded. The generator will
always start when an import power operation is enabled.
Export ..........The value entered for the export level shall always be supplied to the
utility. All load swings are absorbed by the generator(s) provided the
load rating for the generator(s) is not exceeded. The generator will
always start when an export power operation is enabled.
Constant.......The generator shall always supply the value entered for the constant
power level. All load swings are absorbed by the utility. The
generator will always start when a constant power (base load)
operation is enabled.
Int. load control setpoint 2 Load control: internal load control set point 2 0 to 9,999.9 kW
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The load set point 2 is defined in this screen. This value is the reference for the load
5521 controller when performing parallel operations.
Lstg.regler Soll2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the load set point 2 will be enabled, i.e.
12919 the setting of parameter 5540 overrides the setting of parameter 5539. The
LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
Load control setpoint ramp Load control: set point ramp 0.10 to 100.0 %/s
EN
Leistungsregler Rampe
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The different set point values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The
5522 slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the set
point value. The faster the change in the set point is to be carried out, the greater
the value entered here must be.
Note: This ramp is also used in isolated operation for loading or unloading an
additional genset. An excessive oscillation may occur if the ramp is configured
too high.
Load control setpoint maximum Load control: set point maximum 0 to 150 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the maximum generator load is to be limited, a percentage based on the rated
5523 generator power (parameter 1752 on page 38) must be entered here. The
controller adjusts the generator in such a manner that this value is not exceeded.
This parameter limits the set point of the load controller when the generator is in a
mains parallel operation.
Minimum gen. import/export Load control: minimum generator load on import/export 0 to 100 %
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If the minimum generator load is to be limited, a percentage based on the rated
5524 generator power (parameter 1752 on page 38) must be entered here. The
controller will not permit the load to drop below the configured load limit value.
This parameter is only functional when the generator is in a mains parallel
operation.
Aufwärmleistungs- Limit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The maximum load is limited to this percentage of the generator rated power
5532
(parameter 1752 on page 38) until the warm up time (parameter 5534 on
page 227) has expired or the warm up temperature threshold (parameter 5546 on
page 228) has been exceeded.
Aufwärmzeit
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if Warm up mode (parameter 5533) is
5534 configured to "Time controlled".
Warm up mode Load control: warm up mode Analog val contr / Time controlled
EN
Aufwärmmodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Analog val contr .. The maximum load is limited to the value configured in
5533
parameter 5532 until the temperature measured according to the
setting in parameter 5538 has exceeded the threshold configured in
parameter 5546.
Time controlled ... The maximum load is limited to the value configured in
parameter 5532 until the time configured in parameter 5534 has
expired.
Engine warm up criterium Load control: warm up load criterion refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if Warm up mode (parameter 5533) is
5538 configured to "Analog val contr".
The engine warm up criterion may be selected from the available data sources.
Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data source may be used (selecting
a different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
Aufwärm Grenzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only effective if Warm up mode (parameter 5533) is
5546 configured to "Analog val contr".
The maximum load is limited to the value configured in parameter 5532 until the
temperature has exceeded the threshold configured here.
Voltage Control Voltage control: activation PID analog / 3pos controller / Off
EN
Spannungsregler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} PID analog .. The voltage is controlled using an analog PID controller.
5607 3pos contr. ... The voltage is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off ................ Voltage control is not carried out.
Verstärkung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5610
configured to "PID analog".
The proportional coefficient specifies the gain. By increasing the gain, the
response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be controlled.
The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to
return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Integrierbeiwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5611 configured to "PID analog".
The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller. The integral gain
corrects for any offset (between set point and process variable) automatically over
time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset automatically changes the output
requirements until the process variable and the set point are the same. This
parameter permits the user to adjust how quickly the reset attempts to correct for
any offset. The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time
constant. If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually
oscillate. If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to
settle at a steady state.
Differenzierverhältnis
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5612 configured to "PID analog".
The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller. By increasing this
parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will attempt to
slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent excessive overshoot
or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID
loop operates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.
Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5650 configured to "3pos controller".
Isolated operation: The generator voltage is controlled in such a manner that the
measured voltage does not deviate from the configured set point by more than the
value configured in this parameter without the controller issuing a voltage
raise/lower signal to the voltage regulator. This prevents unneeded wear on the
voltage bias output control or the raise/lower relay contacts.
Synchronization: The generator voltage is controlled in such a manner that the
measured voltage does not deviate from the monitored reference (mains or busbar)
voltage by more than the value configured in this parameter without the controller
issuing a voltage raise/lower signal to the voltage regulator. This prevents
unneeded wear on the voltage bias output control or the raise/lower relay contacts.
The value configured for this parameter must be less than the value configured for
the dV max (maximum voltage differential) for synchronization (parameters 5700
or 5710).
Time pulse minimum Voltage control: time pulse minimum 0.01 to 2.00 s
EN
Impulsdauer Minimum
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5651 configured to "3pos controller".
A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible pulse
time should be configured to limit overshoot of the desired voltage reference point.
Verstärkungsfaktor
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5652 configured to "3pos controller".
The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays. By increasing the
number configured in this parameter, the operating time of the relay will be in-
creased in response to a deviation from the voltage reference. By increasing the
gain, the response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be
controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action
is to return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Expand deadband factor Voltage control: expand deadband factor 1.0 to 9.9
EN
Aufweitung Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5653 configured to "3pos controller".
If the measured generator voltage is within the deadband range (parameter 5650)
and the configured delay expand deadband time (parameter 5654) expires, the
deadband will be multiplied with the factor configured here.
Delay expand deadband Voltage control: delay expand deadband 1.0 to 9.9 s
EN
Verzögerung Aufweitung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607) is
5654 configured to "3pos controller".
The measured generator voltage must be within the deadband range for the time
configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor configured in
parameter 5653.
Voltage setpoint 1 source Voltage control: voltage setpoint 1 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The voltage setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data sources. Use
5618 the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The voltage set point may be adjusted within the configured operating limits (refer
to Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48).
Int.voltage control setpoint 1 Voltage control: internal voltage set point 1 50 to 650,000 V
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The internal generator voltage set point 1 is defined in this screen. This value is the
5600 reference for the voltage controller when performing isolated and/or no-load
operations.
Voltage setpoint 2 source Voltage control: voltage setpoint 2 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The voltage setpoint 2 source may be selected from the available data sources. Use
5619 the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The voltage set point may be adjusted within the configured operating limits (refer
to Configure Monitoring: Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48).
Int.voltage control setpoint 2 Voltage control: internal voltage set point 2 50 to 650,000 V
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The internal generator voltage set point 2 is defined in this screen. This value is the
5601
reference for the voltage controller when performing isolated and/or no-load
operations.
Spannung Einstellpunkt 2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the voltage set point 2 will be enabled,
12920 i.e. the setting of parameter 5619 overrides the setting of parameter 5618. The
LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
Startwert
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value refers to the generator voltage set point (parameter 5600 or 5601
5616 on page 232).
The voltage controller is activated when the monitored generator voltage has
exceeded the value configured in this parameter. This prevents the easYgen from
attempting to control the voltage while the engine is completing its start sequence.
Start Verzögerung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The voltage controller is enabled after the configured time for this parameter
5617 expires.
Voltage control set point ramp Voltage control: set point ramp 1.00 to 300.00 %/s
EN
Spannungsregler Rampe
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The different set point values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The slope
5603 of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the set point
value. The faster the change in the set point is to be carried out, the greater the
value entered here must be.
Spannungsregler Statik
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this control is to be operated on a generator in parallel with other generators and
5604 voltage control is enabled, a droop characteristic curve must be used. Each
generator in the system will require the same value to be configured for the droop
characteristic, so that when the system is stable the reactive power will be
distributed proportionally among all generators in relation to their rated reactive
power.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the voltage droop is enabled. The
12905 LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B:
"LogicsManager".
Example
Rated reactive power: 400 kvar
Rated voltage set point: 410 V
Droop 5.0 %
Voltage control initial state Voltage control: initial state 0.0 to 100.0 %
EN
Spannungsregler Grundstellung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The value entered for this parameter is the start reference point for the analog
5608 output to the voltage controller. If the output to the voltage control has been
disabled, the output will act as a control position reference point.
Power factor Control Power factor control: activation PID analog / 3pos controller / Off
EN
Leistungsfaktor-Regler
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} PID analog ...The power factor is controlled using an analog PID controller.
5625
3pos contr. ...The power factor is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off ................Power factor control is not carried out.
Verstärkung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5613 configured to "PID analog".
The proportional coefficient specifies the gain. By increasing the gain, the response
is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be controlled. The farther
out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to return the process
to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the result is excessive
overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Integrierbeiwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5614 configured to "PID analog".
The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller. The integral gain
corrects for any offset (between set point and process variable) automatically over
time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset automatically changes the output
requirements until the process variable and the set point are the same. This
parameter permits the user to adjust how quickly the reset attempts to correct for
any offset. The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time
constant. If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually
oscillate. If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to
settle at a steady state.
EN
Differenzierverhältnis
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5615 configured to "PID analog".
The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller. By increasing this
parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will attempt to
slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent excessive overshoot or
undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID
loop operates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.
Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5660 configured to "3pos controller".
The generator power factor is controlled in such a manner, when paralleled with the
mains, so that the monitored power factor does not deviate from the configured
power factor set point by more than the value configured in this parameter without
the controller issuing a raise/lower signal to the voltage regulator. This prevents
unneeded wear on the raise/lower relay contacts. The configured percentage for the
dead band refers to the generator rated reactive power (parameter 1758 on page 38).
Time pulse minimum Power factor control: time pulse minimum 0.01 to 2.00 s
EN
Impulsdauer Minimum
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5661 configured to "3pos controller".
A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible pulse
time should be configured to limit overshoot of the desired power factor reference
point.
Verstärkungsfaktor
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5662 configured to "3pos controller".
The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays. By increasing the
number configured in this parameter, the operating time of the relay will be in-
creased in response to a deviation from the power factor reference. By increasing
the gain, the response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be
controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action
is to return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Expand deadband factor Power factor control: expand deadband factor 1.0 to 9.9
EN
Aufweitung Unempfindlichkeit
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5663 configured to "3pos controller".
Delay expand deadband Power factor control: delay expand deadband 1.0 to 9.9 s
EN
Verzögerung Aufweitung
DE
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter 5625) is
5664 configured to "3pos controller".
The measured generator power factor must be within the deadband range for the
time configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor configured
in parameter 5663.
Power Factor setpoint 1 source Power factor control: power factor setpoint 1 source refer to text below
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The power factor setpoint 1 source can be selected from the available data sources.
5638 Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The power factor set point may be adjusted between 0.71 leading and 0.71 lagging.
Int: power factor setpoint 1 Power factor control: internal power factor set point 1 -0.710 to +0.710
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The desired power factor may be configured here so that the reactive power is
5620 regulated in the system. The designations "–" and "+" stand for inductive/lagging
(generator overexcited) and capacitive/leading (generator underexcited) reactive
power. This set point is active only in mains parallel operation.
Power Factor setpoint 2 source Power factor control: power factor setpoint 2 source refer to text below
EN
Cos.phi Sollwert 2 Auswahl
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The power factor setpoint 2 source can be selected from the available data sources.
5639 Use the and softkeys to scroll through the list of variables and confirm your
selection with the softkey. Even it is possible to select all data sources (refer to
Appendix C on page 305), only the following data sources may be used (selecting a
different data source may not allow the controller to operate properly):
The power factor set point may be adjusted between 0.71 leading and 0.71 lagging.
Int: power factor setpoint 2 Power factor control: internal power factor set point 2 -0.710 to +0.710
EN
CL1 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The desired power factor may be configured here so that the reactive power is
5621
regulated in the system. The designations "–" and "+" stand for inductive/lagging
(generator overexcited) and capacitive/leading (generator underexcited) reactive
power. This set point is active only in mains parallel operation.
Cos.phi Soll 2
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the power factor set point 2 will be
12921 enabled, i.e. the setting of parameter 5639 overrides the setting of parameter 5638.
The LogicsManager and its default settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix
B: "LogicsManager".
React. pwr. ctrl setpoint ramp Power factor control: reactive power ramp 0.01 to 100.00 %/s
EN
Blindlstg.regler Rampe
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The different set point values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The slope
5622 of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the set point
value. The faster the change in the set point is to be carried out, the greater the
value entered here must be.
Note: This ramp is also used in isolated operation for loading or unloading an
additional genset. An excessive oscillation may occur if the ramp is configured too
high.
The easYgen performs proportional load and/or var sharing. This means each generator will share the load at the
same percentage level of the generator rated power when paralleled against the mains, in an isolated operation
with multiple generators paralleled, or when re-synchronizing the common bus to the mains. Proportional
load/var sharing will not be performed when the easYgen has the GCB closed and is in the constant power/base
load mode. A system can consist out of 32 gensets which are controlled by a single easYgen.
Mains parallel operation with mains interchange real power control (import/export)
The easYgen controllers maintain the real load level on the individually controlled generators at a level so that
the real power set point at the mains interchange remains at the configured set point. The real power set point for
the mains interchange must be configured identically for each easYgen.
The easYgen controller communicates with other controls in the system via a CAN bus. This enables the
controllers to adjust the real power generated by the generator while remaining within the rated power of the
generator. A smaller generator will contribute less real power as compared to a large generator, but they will both
be utilized to the same capacity factor. An example of this would be a 100 kW generator with a configured
1000 kW generator and a mains interchange of 825 kW. The 100 kW generator would contribute 75 kW and the
1000 kW generator would contribute 750 kW or both generators would be at 75% of their rated capacity.
Reactive load sharing is not performed when operating in parallel with the mains. The reactive power control will
be defined by the configured power factor set point of the individual controllers. If the power factor controller set
point is configured as +0.950, the easYgen will proportionally share the real load with all generators in parallel
with the mains while controlling the reactive power at a 0.95 inductive (lagging) power factor regardless of the
what power factor the mains is operating at.
The parameter "Active power Load share factor" (parameter 5530) can be used now to define the priority of the
real power sharing reference variable (real power at interchange). A higher configured percentage influences the
control more towards maintaining the real power set point for the interchange. A lower configured percentage
influences the control more towards maintaining real power sharing between units.
The parameter "React. power Load share factor" (parameter 5630) has no influence here.
The easYgen controllers maintain the voltage and frequency of the individually controlled generators at a
constant level. This makes it imperative that the voltage and frequency set points are configured identically for
each easYgen.
The easYgen controller communicates with other controls in the system via a CAN bus. This enables the
controllers to adjust the real power generated by the generator while remaining within the rated power of the
generator. A smaller generator will contribute less real power as compared to a large generator, but they will both
be utilized to the same capacity factor. An example of this would be a 100 kW generator and a 1000 kW
generator with an 825 kW load. The 100 kW generator would contribute 75 kW and the 1000 kW generator
would contribute 750 kW or both generators would be at 75% of their rated capacity.
The reactive power will be shared proportionally among all generators involved.
The parameter "Active power Load share factor" (parameter 5530) can be used to define the priority of the
reference variable for real power sharing. A higher configured percentage influences the control more towards
frequency control. A lower configured percentage influences the control more towards real power sharing.
The parameter "React. power Load share factor" (parameter 5630) can be used now to define the priority of the
reference variable for reactive power sharing. A higher configured percentage influences the control more
towards voltage control. A lower configured percentage influences the control more towards reactive power
sharing.
The system is operating as an isolated system, for synchronization to be performed the voltage and frequency
differentials of the mains and bus must be within the configured windows.
The bus frequency reference point is dictated by the measured mains frequency and the configured frequency
differential (+ slip frequency setpoint offset (parameter 5502 on page 221)).
Example: If + slip frequency setpoint offset = 0.2 Hz, the easYgen will calculate the bus frequency reference
point as:
[measured mains frequency] + [slip frequency setpoint offset] = bus frequency reference point
A practical example of this would be:
The monitored mains frequency is 60 Hz
Configured + slip frequency setpoint offset = 0.2 Hz
[60 Hz] + [0.2Hz] = 60.2 Hz bus frequency reference point
The differential voltage is configured as a window. The monitored voltage from the potential transformers
secondary for the mains and the bus must be within the configured voltage differential limit in relation to the
rated voltage configuration.
This means that the voltage window dV [%] is in relation to the rated voltage configuration [%].
When the monitored bus frequency and voltage are within the configured differential limits, the "Command:
close MCB" relay will enable, closing the MCB, and the system will be paralleled to the mains.
Prerequisites
All easYgen controllers connected to the system must have rated system frequencies and breaker logic configured
identically and the parameter "Active power load share" (parameter 5531) or "Reactive power load share"
(parameter 5631) must be enabled.
The easYgen utilizes a peer relationship between units to control the system. This permits for parallel
applications of up to 16 generators.
NOTE
Refer to the Interface section of the Installation Manual 37426 for information about the CAN bus
connection.
Refer to Figure 3-29 on page 240 for this diagram. The parameter "Active load sharing factor" determines if and
how a generator performs real power or frequency control when paralleled with other generators in an isolated
operation. This parameter is defined as a percentage. In the figure below 10 % means increased real power
control and 99 % increased frequency control. This parameter must be configured individually for each generator.
In the illustrated control system, it must be noted that each control calculates the mean utilization factor of all
controls from the data transmitted via the CAN bus and then compares this with its own utilization factor. The
utilization factor is compared with the reference variable and results in a new reference variable set point.
Frequency and real power control are carried out simultaneously in these controls (corresponding to the reference
variable).
Frequency control is carried out via the measured voltage/frequency of the voltage system. The MPU is used
merely for monitoring functions, or is available as a control value to the secondary controller.
Active power load share Load share control: active power LS activation On / Off
EN
Wirkleistungsverteilung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Active power load share is enabled. When multiple generators are
5531 operating in parallel, the real power is shared proportionally.
Off ................Active power load share is disabled
Active power load share factor Load share control: active power load share factor 10 to 99 %
EN
Wirkl.verteilg. Führungsgr.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} It is possible to change the emphasis placed on maintaining control variables. By
5530 increasing or decreasing the percentage value in this parameter, the control places
a higher priority on maintaining the primary or secondary control reference
variable. If the value for this parameter is configured higher, maintaining the
primary control variable has a higher priority. If the value for this parameter is
configured lower, maintaining the secondary control variable has a higher priority.
The smaller this factor the higher the priority to equally share the load among all
generators.
If 99 % is configured here, only the primary control reference variable is
considered. If 10 % is configured here, only the secondary control reference
variable is considered.
Reactive power load share Load share control: reactive power LS activation On / Off
EN
Blindleistungsverteilung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On .................Reactive power load share is enabled. When multiple generators are
5631 operating in parallel, the reactive power is shared proportionally.
Off ................Reactive power load share is disabled
React. power load share factor Load share control: reactive power load share factor 10 to 99 %
EN
Blindl.verteilg. Führungsgr.
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} It is possible to change the emphasis placed on maintaining control variables. By
5630 increasing or decreasing the percentage value in this parameter, the control places
a higher priority on maintaining the primary or secondary control reference
variable. If the value for this parameter is configured higher, maintaining the
primary control variable has a higher priority. If the value for this parameter is
configured lower, maintaining the secondary control variable has a higher priority.
The smaller this factor the higher the priority to equally share the load among all
generators.
If 99 % is configured here, only the primary control reference variable is
considered. If 10 % is configured here, only the secondary control reference
variable is considered.
Load sharing with several gensets is possible for a supply of a maximum of four split busbars. A group breakers
splits the busbar in a way that some gensets supply one busbar and some supply another one. However, it is
necessary to group the gensets, which supply the same busbar, into segments.
The configured segment number can be changed to one of three alternative segment numbers. The
LogicsManager is used to realize this.
Example:
Six gensets (G1 through G6) supply a system with two group breakers (A, B) as shown in Figure 3-30. All
gensets have the same segment number configured #1 (parameter 1723)
Case I: Group breakers A and B are closed and G1 through G6 supply the same busbar.
The same segment number is configured to each genset since all gensets supply the same busbar.
Case II: Group breaker A is closed and group breaker B is open (G1 through G4 supply a different busbar than
G5 and G6).
A different segment number must be selected for G5 and G6 by enabling the LogicsManager function
"Segment no.2 act" (parameter 12929) in order to change the segment number of G5 and G6 to #2.
1 1 1
I A B
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
1 1 2
II A B
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6
Segmentnummer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The genset is assigned a load share segment number with this parameter. This
1723 segment number may be overridden by the following parameter 12929.
Segment no.2 act Load share control: segment number 2 active LogicsManager
EN
Segmentnr.2 aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, this genset is
12929 assigned load share segment number 2. The LogicsManager and its default
settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Mode ext. load share interface Load share control: Mode for external load share interface 0 to 16
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The operation mode for the external Woodward LSI load share interface is
5568 configured here.
The discrete raise/lower function always uses the actual value at the time when this function is enabled for the
respective controller set point as initial value. If the actual value is negative at this point in time, the initial value
is zero.
Frequency and voltage may be adjusted within the configured operating limits (refer to Configure Monitoring:
Generator, Operating Voltage / Frequency on page 48). Active power may be adjusted between 0 and the
configured load control setpoint maximum (parameter 5523 on page 227). The power factor may be adjusted
between 0.71 leading and 0.71 lagging.
Discrete f/P + Setpoints digital poti: raise f/P set point LogicsManager
EN
Sollwert f/P +
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the frequency /
12900 load set point will be raised. The LogicsManager and its default settings are
explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Discrete f/P - Setpoints digital poti: lower f/P set point LogicsManager
EN
Sollwert f/P -
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the frequency /
12901 load set point will be lowered. The LogicsManager and its default settings are
explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Discrete V/PF + Setpoints digital poti: raise V/Q set point LogicsManager
EN
Sollwert U/Q +
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the voltage /
12902 reactive power set point will be raised. The LogicsManager and its default settings
are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Discrete V/PF - Setpoints digital poti: lower V/Q set point LogicsManager
EN
Sollwert U/Q -
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the voltage /
12903 reactive power set point will be lowered. The LogicsManager and its default
settings are explained on page 271 in Appendix B: "LogicsManager".
Configure Interfaces
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
NOTE
Please refer to the Interface Manual 37430 for a detailed description of the interface parameters.
NOTE
The CAN bus is a field bus and subject to various disturbances. Therefore, it cannot be guaranteed that
every request will be answered. We recommend to repeat a request, which is not answered within
reasonable time.
Baudrate CAN bus 1: Baud rate 20 / 50 / 100 / 125 / 250 / 500 / 800 / 1,000 kBaud
EN
Baudrate
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the used Baud rate. Please note, that all participants on the
3156
CAN bus must use the same Baud rate.
Node-ID CAN-Bus 1
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A number that is unique to the control must be set in this parameter so that this
8950 control unit can be correctly identified on the CAN bus. This address number may
only be used once on the CAN bus. All additional addresses are calculated based
on this unique device number.
NOTE
We recommend to configure the Node-IDs for units, which participate in load sharing, as low as
possible to facilitate establishing of communication.
EN
CANopen Master
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} One bus participant must take over the network management and put the other
8993 participants into "operational" mode. The easYgen is able to perform this task.
NOTE
If CANopen Master (parameter 8993) is configured to "Off", the Master controller (for example a PLC)
must send a "Start_Remote_node" message to initiate the load share message transmission of the
easYgen.
If no "Start_Remote_node" message would be sent, the complete system would not be operational.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Independent from the CANopen Master configuration, the unit transmits a
9120 heartbeat message with this configured heartbeat cycle time. If the producer
heartbeat time is equal 0, the heartbeat will only be sent as response to a remote
frame request. The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 20 ms step.
COB ID SYNC Message CAN bus 1: COB ID SYNC Message 1 to FFFFFFFF hex
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines whether the unit generates the SYNC message or not.
9100
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1005, subindex 0; defines the COB ID of the
synchronization object (SYNC). The structure of this object is shown in the following tables:
Producer SYNC Message time CAN bus 1: Sending time for SYNC Message 0 to 65000 ms
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the cycle time of the SYNC message. If the unit is configured for this
8940 function (parameter 9100) it will send the SYNC message with this interval. The
time configured here will be rounded up to the next 10 ms step.
COB-ID TIME Message CAN bus 1: COB ID TIME Message 1 to FFFFFFFF hex
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines whether the unit generates the TIME message or not.
9101
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1012, subindex 0; defines the COB ID of the time object
(TIME). The structure of this object is shown in the following tables:
NOTE
The CAN bus is a field bus and subject to various disturbances. Therefore, it cannot be guaranteed that
every request will be answered. We recommend to repeat a request, which is not answered within
reasonable time.
NOTE
The first Node ID is the standard Node ID of CAN interface 1 (parameter 8950).
2. Node-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier (Node ID) from
33040 the unit. in order to send remote signals (i.e. remote start, stop, or acknowledge) to
the unit. The additional SDO channel will be made available by configuring this
Node ID to a value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the PLC.
3. Node-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier (Node ID) from
33041 the unit. in order to send remote signals (i.e. remote start, stop, or acknowledge) to
the unit. The additional SDO channel will be made available by configuring this
Node ID to a value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the PLC.
4. Node-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier (Node ID) from
33042 the unit. in order to send remote signals (i.e. remote start, stop, or acknowledge) to
the unit. The additional SDO channel will be made available by configuring this
Node ID to a value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the PLC.
5. Node-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier (Node ID) from
33043 the unit. in order to send remote signals (i.e. remote start, stop, or acknowledge) to
the unit. The additional SDO channel will be made available by configuring this
Node ID to a value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the PLC.
COB-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs, the device is
9300 able to receive.
9310
9320
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for RPDO 1, 1401 for RPDO 2 and 1402 for
TPDO 3), subindex 1. The structure of this object is shown in the following tables:
PDO valid / not valid allows to select, which PDOs are used in the operational state.
NOTE
Do not configure an RPDO or TPDO with a COB-ID higher than 580 (hex) or lower than 180 (hex). These
IDs are reserved for internal purposes.
EN
Event-timer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter configures the time, from which this PDO is marked as "not
9121 existing". The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
9122
9123 Received messages are processed by the control unit every 20 ms. Messages, which
are sent faster, will be discarded. We recommend to configure ten times the cycle
time of the received data here.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for TPDO 1, 1401 for TPDO 2 and 1402 for
TPDO 3), subindex 5
Selected Data Protocol CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - Selected data protocol 0 to 65535
EN
Ausgewähltes Datenprotocoll
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A data protocol may be selected by entering the data protocol ID here. If 0 is
8970 configured here, the message assembled by the mapping parameters is used. If an
8971
8972 unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated by the CAN
status bits. Possible data protocol IDs are:
• 65000: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 1 through 8
• 65001: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 9 through 16
• 65002: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 17 through 24
• 65003: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 25 through 32
Number of Mapped Objects CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - Number of mapped objects 0 to 4
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the number of valid entries within the mapping record. This
9910 number is also the number of the application variables, which shall be received with
9915
9905 the corresponding PDO.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1600 (for RPDO 1, 1601 for RPDO 2 and 1602 for
RPDO 3), subindex 0
1. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - 1. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
1. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9911 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9916
9906 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1600 (for RPDO 1, 1601 for RPDO 2 and 1602 for
RPDO 3), subindex 1
2. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - 2. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
2. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9912
9917
These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9907 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1600 (for RPDO 1, 1601 for RPDO 2 and 1602 for
RPDO 3), subindex 2
3. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - 3. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
3. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9913 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9918
9908 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1600 (for RPDO 1, 1601 for RPDO 2 and 1602 for
RPDO 3), subindex 3
4. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Receive PDO {x} - 4. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
4. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9914 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9919
9909 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1600 (for RPDO 1, 1601 for RPDO 2 and 1602 for
RPDO 3), subindex 4
COB-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit is
9600 able to transmit. The unit transmits data (i.e. visualization data) on the CAN ID
9610
9620 configured here.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 for (TPDO 1, 1801 for TPDO 2 and 1802 for
TPDO 3), subindex 1. The structure of this object is shown in the following tables:
PDO valid / not valid allows to select, which PDOs are used in the operational state.
NOTE
Do not configure an RPDO or TPDO with a COB-ID higher than 580 (hex) or lower than 180 (hex). These
IDs are reserved for internal purposes.
Transmission type CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - Transmission type 0 to 255
EN
Transmission type
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit is
9602 able to transmit. It defines whether the unit broadcasts all data automatically (value
9612
9622 254 or 255) or only upon request with the configured address of the COB ID SYNC
message (parameter 9100).
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 (for TPDO 1, 1801 for TPDO 2 and 1802 for
TPDO 3), subindex 2. The description of the transmission type is shown in the following table:
A value between 1 and 240 means that the PDO is transferred synchronously and cyclically. The
transmission type indicating the number of SYNC, which are necessary to trigger PDO transmissions.
Receive PDOs are always triggered by the following SYNC upon reception of data independent of the
transmission types 0 to 240. For TPDOs, transmission type 254 and 255 means, the application event is
the event timer.
Event timer CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - Event timer 0 to 65500 ms
EN
Event-timer
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit is
9604
9614
able to transmit. The broadcast cycle for the transmitted data is configured here.
9624 The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 (for TPDO 1, 1801 for TPDO 2 and 1802 for
TPDO 3), subindex 5
Selected Data Protocol CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - Selected data protocol 0 to 65535
EN
Ausgewähltes Datenprotocoll
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} A data protocol may be selected by entering the data protocol ID here. If 0 is
8962 configured here, the message assembled by the mapping parameters is used. If an
8963
8964 unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated by the CAN
status bits. Possible data protocol IDs are:
• 65000: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 1 through 8
• 65001: IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 9 through 16
• 5100: Data telegram
• 5101: Data telegram
• 5102: Data telegram
Number of Mapped Objects CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - Number of mapped objects 0 to 4
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the mapping for the PDOs the unit is able to transmit. This
9609 number is also the number of the application variables, which shall be transmitted
9619
9629 with the corresponding PDO.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and 1A02 for
TPDO 3), subindex 0
1. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - 1. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
1. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9605 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9615
9625 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and 1A02 for
TPDO 3), subindex 1
2. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - 2. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
2. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9606 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9616
9626 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and 1A02 for
TPDO 3), subindex 2
3. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - 3. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
3. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9607 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9617
9627 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and 1A02 for
TPDO 3), subindex 3
4. Mapped Object CAN bus 1: Transmit PDO {x} - 4. mapped object 0 to 65535
EN
4. Mapped Objekt
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter contains the information about the mapped application variables.
9608 These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index is always 1.
9618
9628 The length is determined automatically.
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 (for TPDO 1, 1A01 for TPDO 2 and 1A02 for
TPDO 3), subindex 4
NOTE
CANopen allows to send 8 byte of data with each Transmit PDO. These may be defined separately if no
pre-defined data protocol is used.
All data protocol parameters with a parameter ID may be sent as an object with a CANopen Transmit
PDO.
In this case, the data length will be taken from the data byte column (refer to the Data Protocols section
in the Interface Manual 37430):
• 1,2 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
• 3,4 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
• 5,6 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
• 1,2,3,4 UNSIGNED32 or SIGNED32
• 3,4,5,6 UNSIGNED32 or SIGNED32
• etc.
The object ID is identical with the parameter ID when configuring via front panel or ToolKit.
Baudrate
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the used Baud rate. Please note, that all participants on the
3157 CAN bus must use the same Baud rate.
CANopen Interface
Dieses Gerät
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The Node ID for the control unit (this device ) is configured here.
9940
IKD1 DI/DO 1..8 CAN bus 2: Node ID for IKD 1 DI/DO 1-8 Off / Node-ID 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit is pre-configured for the connection of a Woodward IKD 1 expansion
9930 board with the discrete inputs/outputs 1 through 8 by configuring a Node ID here.
IKD1 DI/DO 9..16 CAN bus 2: Node ID for IKD 1 DI/DO 9-16 Off / Node-ID 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit is pre-configured for the connection of a Woodward IKD 1 expansion
9931 board with the discrete inputs/outputs 9 through 16 by configuring a Node ID here.
Phoenix DI/DO 1..16 CAN bus 2: Node ID for Phoenix DI/DO 1-16 Off / Node-ID 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The unit is pre-configured for the connection of a Phoenix Contact expansion board
9934 with the discrete inputs/outputs 1 through 16 by configuring a Node ID here.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter starts the configuration of external Phoenix expansion boards.
15134
Proceed as follows to configure an external device:
• Connect external device
• Configure parameters at the easYgen (Node ID, DI/Os, AI/Os)
• Set this parameter to Yes
• Verify the successful configuration of the external device
Note: This parameter can only be used to configure a Phoenix expansion board.
Refer to the IKD 1 manual 37135 for configuring the IKD 1 expansion boards.
J1939 Interface
J1939 Geräte-Adresse
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The easYgen sends J1939 request and control messages with this ID. It must be
15106 changed for different ECU types according to the following table. The ECU
listens only to control messages, if they are sent to the correct address.
S6 EMR2 EMS2 ADEC EGS EDC7 EEM
Scania Deutz Volvo MTU Woodward MAN SISU Cummins
39 3 17 1 234 253 n/a 220
Details may be found in the manual of the genset control and the interface
manual 37430.
Note: Changing this parameter becomes only effective after restarting the unit.
Adresse Motorsteuerung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Configures the address of the J1939 device, which is controlled.
15107
S6 EMR2 EMS2 ADEC EGS EDC7 EEM
Scania Deutz Volvo MTU Woodward MAN SISU Cummins
0 0 0 128 0 39 0 / (1) 0
Reset previous act. DTCs - DM3 J1939 Interface: Reset previously active DTCs - DM3 Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this parameter is set Yes, a DM3 message "Acknowledge passive faults" is
15108 sent. After that this parameter is reset automatically to No.
As a result alarms (DM2) which no longer apply are cleared.
Reset act. DTCs - DM11 J1939 Interface: Reset active DTCs - DM11 Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this parameter is set Yes, a DM11 message "Acknowledge active faults" is
15133
sent. After that this parameter is reset automatically to No.
As a result alarms (DM1) which no longer apply are cleared.
SPN Version
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The J1939 protocol provides 4 different versions for formatting Suspect
15103 Parameter Number. This is important for a correct display of the alarm messages.
With this parameter it is defined if formatting occurs according to Version 1,
Version 2, or Version 3. Formatting according to Version 4 is identified
automatically.
Details may be found in the engine control J1939 manual.
Betriebsmodus
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The J1939 interface of this device may be operated with different engine control
15102 units or analog input devices. This parameter determines the operating mode of
the used ECU.
NOTE
Refer to the Appendix of the Interface Manual 37430 for a list of all ECUs, which are supported beyond
the J1939 standard.
This parameter must not be disabled if any J1939 device (like an analog input device) is connected to
the easYgen, even if no ECU is connected!
ECU remote controlled J1939 Interface: ECU remote control via J1939 On / Off
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} On ................ The unit sends J1939 control messages to the ECU. Depending on
15127 the selected device type (Parameter 15102), contains a specific
selection of commands. Available messages are speed deviation
and droop for all ECUs as well as engine start/stop, enable idle
mode, rated speed switch and preglow for some ECUs. Refer to the
interface manual 37430 for more detailed information.
Off................ The ECU remote control via the J1939 protocol will be disabled.
NOTE
The unit sends J1939 control messages to the ECU. Depending on the selected device type (Parameter
15102), it contains a specific selection of commands. Available messages are speed deviation and
droop for ECUs as well as engine start/stop, enable idle mode, rated speed switch and preglow for
some ECUs. Refer to the interface manual 37430 for more detailed information.
EN
Drehzahlhub
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter is only visible if ECU remote controlled
5537 (parameter 15127) is configured to "On".
This parameter adjusts the range of the speed deviation around the rated speed,
which is sent to the ECU.
It relates to the engine rated speed (parameter 1601). There are two methods of
sending the speed set point to the ECU: With a speed offset and a speed setpoint.
The frequency and power control must be configured to "PID".
Speed set point: EMR2 Deutz, ADEC MTU, EGS Woodward, EEM SISU,
Standard
The easYgen sends a speed set point in rpm (every 10 ms) that varies around the
rated speed in the range of +/- the speed deviation.
How to test this parameter during commissioning:
Isolated operation: Disable the frequency controller and change parameter 5508
for the initial state between 0 and 100%, the engine should change the speed as
follows:
Note: Keep this value as small as possible, i.e. do not enter a speed deviation of
500, if the engine varies only between 1400 and 1600rpm.
Mains parallel operation: Check with the set point in the display if the engine is
able to deliver the full power.
NOTE
The Wodward EGS ECU supports both types of speed deviation control and may be configured either
to "Speed offset" or "Speed set point".
In mains parallel operation, the EGS can be configured to receive a real power set point from the
easYgen to control the power. In this case, real power control must be disabled in the easYgen.
Load share Interface CAN Interface: load share interface CAN #1 / Off
EN
Schnittstelle Lastverteilung
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The interface, which is used for transmitting the load share data is configured
9923 here.
Transfer rate LS fast message CAN Interface: transfer rate load share fast message 0.10 to 0.30 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The transfer rate defines the time delay between two fast CAN messages.
9921 In case of CAN systems with a high bus load (e.g. long distance between the
units with low baud rate), a shorter transfer rate (higher time setting) helps to
reduce the bus load.
Load Share CAN-ID CAN Interface: load share CAN ID 2xx Hex / 3xx Hex / 4xx Hex / 5xx Hex
EN
Lastverteilungs CAN-ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The first digit of the CAN ID or the range (i.e. 2xx means 200 through 2FF) is
9920 configured here. The last two digits will be assigned by the control with the
settings from the device number (parameter 1702 on page 32).
Baudrate Serial interface 1: Baud rate 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4 / 19.2 / 38.4 / 56 / 115 kBaud
EN
Baudrate
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please note, that all
3163 participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.
Parity
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The used parity of the interface is set here.
3161
Stop Bits
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The number of stop bits is set here.
3162
ModBus Slave ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device via Modbus, is
3185 entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus is disabled.
Reply delay time Serial interface 1: Reply delay time 0.00 to 1.00 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Modbus master and the
3186 sent response of the slave. This time is also required if an external interface
converter to RS-485 is used for example.
Baudrate Serial interface 2: Baud rate 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / 14.4 / 19.2 / 38.4 / 56 / 115 kBaud
EN
Baudrate
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please note, that all
3170 participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.
Parity
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The used parity of the interface is set here.
3171
Stop Bits
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The number of stop bits is set here.
3172
ModBus Slave ID
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device via Modbus, is
3188 entered here. If "0" is configured here, the Modbus is disabled.
Reply delay time Serial interface 2: Reply delay time 0.00 to 2.55 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Modbus master and the
3189 sent response of the slave. This time is required in halfduplex mode.
Configure LogicsManager
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Parameter table Level Text Setting range Default value
Configure LogicsManager
Flag {x} LogicsManager (0 & 1) & 1
Timer 1: Hour 0 to 23 h 8h
Timer 1: Minute 0 to 59 min 0 min
Timer 1: Second 0 to 59 s 0s
Timer 2: Hour 0 to 23 h 17 h
Timer 2: Minute 0 to 59 min 0 min
Timer 2: Second 0 to 59 s 0s
Active day 1 to 31 1
Active hour 0 to 23 12
Active minute 0 to 59 min 0 min
Active second 0 to 59 s 0s
Monday active Yes / No Yes
Tuesday active Yes / No Yes
Wednesday active Yes / No Yes
Thursday active Yes / No Yes
Friday active Yes / No Yes
Saturday active Yes / No No
Sunday active Yes / No No
Use ASA symbols Yes / No No
Table 3-116: Application - standard values - configure LogicsManager
The easYgen LogicsManager screens show logical symbols according to the IEC standard by default. However,
it is also possible to change the LogicsManager screens to ASA standard. Table 3-120 on page 272 shows the
symbols according to the different standards.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ............... Symbols according to the ASA standard are used in LogicsManager
4117 screens.
No ................. Symbols according to the IEC standard are used in LogicsManager
screens.
Internal flags within the LogicsManager logical outputs may be programmed and used for multiple functions. For
conditions and explanation of programming please refer to page 271 in chapter "LogicsManager").
Merker {x}
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} The flags may be used as auxiliary flags for complex combinations by using the
yyyyy
logical output of these flags as command variable for other logical outputs.
Flag {x} Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3 Flag 4 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 7 Flag 8
Parameter ID yyyyy 12230 12240 12250 12260 12270 12280 12290 12300
Flag {x} Flag 9 Flag 10 Flag 11 Flag 12 Flag 13 Flag 14 Flag 15 Flag 16
Parameter ID yyyyy 12910 12911 12912 12913 12914 12915 12916 12917
Table 3-117: Internal flags - parameter IDs
NOTE
Flag 1 is also used as placeholder in other logical combinations. Flag 8 is preset with a timer start and
shows different default values compared with Table 3-116.
Timer {x}: Hour Timer: Daily time set point {x} [x = 1/2]: hour 0 to 23 h
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the hour of the daily time set point here. Example:
1652 0 ....................0th hour of the day (midnight).
1657
23 ..................23rd hour of the day (11pm).
Timer {x}: Minute Timer: Daily time set point {x} [x = 1/2]: minute 0 to 59 min
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the minute of the daily time set point here. Example:
1651 0 ....................0th minute of the hour.
1656
59 ..................59th minute of the hour.
Timer {x}: Second Timer: Daily time set point {x} [x = 1/2]: second 0 to 59 s
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the second of the daily time set point here. Example
1650 0 ....................0th second of the minute.
1655
59 ..................59th second of the minute.
Aktiver Tag
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the day of the active switch point here. Example:
1663 01 ..................1st day of the month.
31 ..................31st day of the month.
The active time set point is enabled during the indicated day from 0:00:00 hours to
23:59:59 hours.
Aktive Stunde
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the hour of the active switch point here. Example:
1662 0 ....................0th hour of the day.
23 ..................23rd hour of the day.
The active time set point is enabled every day during the indicated hour from
minute 0 to minute 59.
Aktive Minute
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the minute of the active switch point here. Example:
1661 0 ....................0th minute of the hour.
59 ..................59th minute of the hour.
The active time set point is enabled every hour during the indicated minute from
second 0 to second 59.
EN
Aktive Sekunde
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Enter the second of the active switch point here. Example:
1660 0.................... 0th second of the minute.
59.................. 59th second the minute.
The active time set point is enabled every minute during the indicated second.
Monday active Timer: Weekly time set points Monday: days Yes / No
EN
Montag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1670 Monday ........... Yes - The switch point is enabled every Monday
No - The switch point is disabled every Monday
Tuesday active Timer: Weekly time set points Tuesday: days Yes / No
EN
Dienstag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1671 Tuesday ........... Yes - The switch point is enabled every Tuesday
No - The switch point is disabled every Tuesday
Wednesday active Timer: Weekly time set points Wednesday: days Yes / No
EN
Mittwoch aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1672 Wednesday ...... Yes - The switch point is enabled every Wednesday
No - The switch point is disabled every Wednesday
Thursday active Timer: Weekly time set points Thursday: days Yes / No
EN
Donnerstag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1673 Thursday ......... Yes - The switch point is enabled every Thursday
No - The switch point is disabled every Thursday
Friday active Timer: Weekly time set points Friday: days Yes / No
EN
Freitag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1674 Friday .............. Yes - The switch point is enabled every Friday
No - The switch point is disabled every Friday
Saturday active Timer: Weekly time set points Saturday: days Yes / No
EN
Samstag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1675 Saturday .......... Yes - The switch point is enabled every Saturday
No - The switch point is disabled every Saturday
Sunday active Timer: Weekly time set points Sunday: days Yes / No
EN
Sonntag aktiv
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Please enter the days of the weekly workdays.
1676 Sunday ............. Yes - The switch point is enabled every Sunday
No - The switch point is disabled every Sunday
Configure Counters
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Parameter table Level Text Setting range Default value
Configure counters
Maintenance hours 0 to 9999 h 300 h
Reset maintenance period hrs Yes / No No
Maintenance days 0 to 999 d 365 d
Reset maintenance period days Yes / No No
Code level for reset maint. 0 to 3 3
Counter value preset 0 to 99999999 0
Set operation hours in 0.00h Yes / No No
Counter value preset 0 to 99999999 0
Gen. active power [0.00MWh] Yes / No No
Counter value preset 0 to 65535 0
Set number of starts Yes / No No
Table 3-118: Application - standard values - configure counters
Wartungsintervall Stunden
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} To disable the maintenance "hours" counter configure "0" for this entry.
2550
This parameter defines the remaining hours until the next maintenance call
occurs. Once the generator has been operated for the number of hours configured
here, a maintenance message is displayed.
If the maintenance counter is reset either by the push-buttons at the front panel
(refer to manual 37428), or by configuring the parameter "Reset maintenance
call" to "Yes" (parameter 2562 on page 266), the maintenance counter is reset to
the configured value.
Reset maintenance period hrs Counter: Reset maintenance call counter 'Hours' Yes / No
EN
Wartungsstunden rücksetzen
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the maintenance "hours" counter is reset
2562 to the configured value. Once the counter has been reset, the control unit changes
this parameter to "No".
Note: When using a specific code level in parameter 2567 for reset of maint.
hours this parameter can be blocked.
EN
Wartungsintervall Tage
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} To disable the maintenance "days" counter configure "0" for this entry.
2551
This parameter defines the remaining days until the next maintenance call occurs.
Once the configured number of days has expired since the last maintenance, a
maintenance message is displayed.
If the maintenance counter is reset either by the push-buttons at the front panel
(refer to manual 37428), or by configuring the parameter "Reset maintenance
call" to "Yes" (parameter 2563 on page 267), the maintenance counter is reset to
the configured value.
Reset maintenance period days Counter: Reset maintenance call counter 'Days' Yes / No
EN
Wartungstage rücksetzen
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the maintenance "days" counter is reset to
2563 the configured value. Once the counter has been reset, the control unit changes
this parameter to "No".
Note: When using a specific code level in parameter 2567 for reset of maint. days
this parameter can be blocked.
Code level for reset maint. Counter: Code level for resetting the maintenance call 0 to 3
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter determines the required code level for resetting the counter
2567 "Maintenance call in...". User with a lower code level may not access this function.
The following code levels exist:
3 = Commissioner
2 = Temporary commissioner
1 = Service level
0 = Operator
Counter value preset Counter: Set point value for counters 0 to 99,999,999
EN
Zähler-Setzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This value is utilized to set the following counters:
2515
• operation hours counter
• kWh counter
• kvarh counter
The number entered into this parameter is the number that will be set to the
parameters listed above when they are enabled.
Set operation hours in 0.00h Counter: Set operation hours counter Yes / No
EN
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value
2574 configured in "set point value for counters". After the counter has
been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.
No ................. The value of this counter is not changed.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value
2510 configured in "set point value for counters". After the counter has
been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.
No ................. The value of this counter is not changed.
NOTE
Example: The counter value preset (parameter 2515 on page 267) is configured to "3456".
If parameter 2574 will be configured to Yes, the operation hour counter will be set to 3456h.
If parameter 2510 will be configured to Yes, the active energy counter will be set to 34.56MWh.
Counter value preset Counter: Set point value for start counter 0 to 65535
EN
Zähler-Setzwert
DE
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} This parameter defines the number of times the control unit registers a start of
2541
the generator set. The number entered here will overwrite the current displayed
value after confirming with parameter 2542 on page 268.
CL2 {0} {1o} {1oc} {2oc} Yes ................ The current value of the start counter is overwritten with the value
2542 configured in "Set point value for start counter". After the counter
has been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No"
automatically.
No ................. The value of this counter is not changed..
Appendix A.
Miscellaneous
Alarm Classes
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The control functions are structured in the following alarm classes:
Alarm class Visible in the display LED "Alarm" Relay "Command: Shut-down engine Engine blocked until
& horn open GCB" ack. sequence has
been performed
A yes no no no no
Warning Alarm
This alarm does not interrupt the unit operation. A message output without a centralized alarm occurs:
Alarm text.
B yes yes no no no
Warning Alarm
This alarm does not interrupt the unit operation. An output of the centralized alarm occurs and the command variable 3.05
(horn) is issued.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn).
C yes yes soft unloading cool down time yes
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the GCB is opened and the engine is stopped. Coasting occurs.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Coasting + Engine stop.
D yes yes immediately cool down time yes
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the GCB is opened and the engine is stopped. Coasting occurs.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Coasting + Engine stop.
E yes yes soft unloading immediately yes
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the GCB is opened immediately and the engine is stopped.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn)+ GCB open + Engine stop.
F yes yes immediately immediately yes
Shutdown Alarm
With this alarm the GCB is opened immediately and the engine is stopped.
Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn)+ GCB open + Engine stop.
Control no no no no no
Control Signal
This signal issues a control command only. It may be assigned to a discrete input for example to get a control signal, which
may be used in the LogicsManager. No alarm message and no entry in the alarm list or the event history will be issued.
This signal is always self-acknowledging, but considers a delay time and may also be configured with an engine delay.
CAUTION
If an alarm of class C, D, or E is present and the GCB cannot be opened, the engine will not be stopped.
This can only be achieved by enabling GCB monitoring (parameter 2600 on page 114) with the alarm
class configured to "F" (parameter 2601 on page 114).
NOTE
If an alarm has been configured with a shutdown alarm that has been enabled to self-acknowledge, and
has been configured as engine delayed the following scenario may happen:
• The alarm shuts down the engine because of its alarm class.
• Due to the engine stopping, all engine delayed alarms are ignored.
• The alarm class is acknowledged automatically.
• The alarm will self-acknowledge and clear the fault message that shut the engine down. This
prevents the fault from being analyzed. After a short delay, the engine will restart.
• After the engine monitoring delay expires, the fault that originally shut down the engine will do so
again. This cycle will continue to repeat until corrected.
Conversion Factors
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Temperature
°C °F °F °C
T [°F] = (T [°C] x 1.8) + 32 T [°C] = (T [°F] – 32) / 1.8
Pressure
bar psi psi bar
P [psi] = P [bar] x 14.503 P [bar] = P [psi] / 14.503
Appendix B.
LogicsManager
The LogicsManager is used to customize the sequence of events in the control unit such as the start command of
the engine or the operation of control unit relay outputs. For example, the start routine may be programmed so
that it requires the closing of a discrete input or a preset time of day. Depending on the application mode of the
unit, the number of available relays that may be programmed with the LogicsManager will vary. Two
independent time delays are provided for the configured action to take place and be reset.
• Command (variable) - A list of over 400 parameters and functions is provided for the command inputs.
Examples of the parameters that may be configured into these commands are generator undervoltage
thresholds 1 and 2, start fail, and cool down. These command variables are used to control the output function
or relay. Refer to Logical Command Variables starting on page 277 for a complete list of all command
variables.
• Sign - The sign field can be used to invert the state of the command or to fix its output to a logical true or
false if the command is not needed. Setting the sign to the NOT state changes the output of the command
variable from true to false or vice versa.
• Operator - A logical device such as AND or OR.
• (Logical) output - The action or control sequence that occurs when all parameters set into the
LogicsManager are met.
[Cx] - Command {x} [Sx] - Sign {x} [Ox] - Operator {x} [Ax] - Output {x}
Value {[Cx]}
The value [Cx] is
passed 1:1. AND
Logical AND
[Ax] = ( ( [C1] & [S1] ) & [O1] & ( [C2] & [S2] ) ) & [O2] & ( [C3] & [S3] )
Figure 3-33: LogicsManager - display in ToolKit Figure 3-34: LogicsManager - display on LCD screen
Logical Symbols
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The following symbols are used for the graphical programming of the LogicsManager. The easYgen displays
symbols according to the IEC standard by default. It is possible to change to ASA standard display using
parameter 4117 on page 263.
DIN 40 700
ASA
US MIL
(configurable)
IEC617-12
& >=1 & >=1 = =1
Truth x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y
table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
Table 3-120: LogicsManager - logical symbols
Logical Outputs
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The logical outputs or combinations may be grouped into three categories:
NOTE
The numbers of the logical outputs in the third column may again be used as input variable for other
outputs in the LogicsManager.
The following table contains the priority relationships between the start conditions of the logical outputs in the
LogicsManager:
Table 3-119 shows the function of each relay in each of the application modes.
Factory Setting
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
The inputs, outputs, and internal flags, which may be programmed via the LogicsManager have the following
factory default settings when delivered:
[00.36] Flag 15
[00.37] Flag 16
[00.47] Relay 7 [R07] - Mains decoupling / freely configurable / Command: open GCB
[00.xx] External digital output {y} - free (external expansion card, if connected; {xx} = 63 to 78 ; {y} = 1 to 16)
Discrete Inputs
[DI01] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
EMERGENCY STOP
{1oc}
alarm class F
{2oc}
[DI02] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
LogicsManager Start in AUTO
{1oc}
alarm class Control
{2oc}
[DI03] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
Low oil pressure
{1oc}
alarm class B
{2oc}
[DI04] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
Coolant temperature
{1oc}
alarm class B
{2oc}
[DI05] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
LogicsManager External acknowledgement
{1oc}
alarm class Control
{2oc}
[DI06] {0}
freely configurable, pre-assigned to
{1o}
LogicsManager Enable MCB
{1oc}
alarm class Control
{2oc}
[DI07] {0}
{1o}
Reply MCB (not available in the LogicsManager)
{1oc}
{2oc}
[DI08] {0}
{1o}
Reply GCB (not available in the LogicsManager)
{1oc}
{2oc}
[DI09] {0}
{1o} freely configurable discrete input (unassigned)
{1oc} alarm class B
{2oc}
[DI10] {0}
{1o} freely configurable discrete input (unassigned)
{1oc} alarm class B
{2oc}
Appendix C.
Analog Manager
To enhance flexibility of programming the functions of the easYgen-2000 Series, an analog manager is used. All
analog values, which are delivered by the easYgen may be used as data sources for the analog outputs (refer to
Configure Analog Outputs on page 171), the flexible limit monitoring (refer to Configure Monitoring: Flexible
Limits on page 120), and the controller set points (refer to Configure Application: Configure Controller on
page 215).
Every data source is indicated by a group number and a sub-number.
Some values are percentage values and relate to reference values.
Data Sources
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Group 00: Internal Values
If the analog input type (parameter 1000 on page 160) is configured to VDO or Pt100, the following display
value formats apply:
Analog input type Display value format Example value Example format
Table A/B 1% 10% 10
Linear - 453 453
Pt100 1°C 103°C 103
VDO 120°C 1°C 69°C 69
VDO 150°C 1°C 73°C 73
VDO 10 bar 0.01 bar 6.6 bar 660
VDO 5 bar 0.01 bar 5.0 bar 500
Off - - -
Table 3-122: Analog Manager - display value format
Reference Values
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
NOTE
Refer to the Configure Analog Outputs section on page 171 for a description of the configuration
parameters for the analog output.
Refer to the Configure Monitoring: Flexible Limits section on page 119 for a description of the
configuration parameters for the flexible limits.
If a generator voltage of 40 V (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a generator voltage of 440 V (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a generator voltage of 240 V is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a generator voltage of 400 V is measured, the analog output issues 90 % of its upper limit (i.e. 18 mA)
If a mains voltage of 40 V (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a mains voltage of 440 V (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a mains voltage of 240 V is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a mains voltage of 400 V is measured, the analog output issues 90 % of its upper limit (i.e. 18 mA)
Rated Frequency
All frequency values (generator, mains, busbar 1) refer to the rated system frequency (parameter 1750 on
page 37).
If a frequency of 45 Hz (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a frequency of 55 Hz (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a frequency of 50 Hz is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a frequency of 51 Hz is measured, the analog output issues 60 % of its upper limit (i.e. 12 mA)
If an active power of 0 kW is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If an active power of 600 kW (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If an active power of 300 kW is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If an active power of 120 kW is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
If a reactive power of 0 kvar is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a reactive power of 600 kvar (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a reactive power of 300 kvar is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a reactive power of 120 kvar is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
NOTE
Above example is valid for inductive/lagging power. If capacitive/leading power is to be output, the
settings for the source value at min/max output must be negative.
If a real power of 0 kW is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a real power of 600 kW (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a real power of 300 kW is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a real power of 120 kW is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
If a reactive power of 0 kvar is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a reactive power of 600 kvar (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a reactive power of 300 kvar is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a reactive power of 120 kvar is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
If an apparent power of 0 kVA is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If an apparent power of 339.41 kVA (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If an apparent power of 169.71 kVA is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If an apparent power of 67.88 kVA is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
If an apparent power of 0 kVA is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If an apparent power of 339.41 kVA (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If an apparent power of 169.71 kVA is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If an apparent power of 67.88 kVA is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
5000
Value 0001 2500 4000 4500 5500 6000 7500 9999
Leading Lagging
PF 0.01 0.50 0.80 0.90 0.90 0.80 0.50 0.01
(capacitive) 1.00 (inductive)
Flexible limits: overrun underrun
Figure 3-35: Reference values - power factor scaling
If a power factor of leading 0.8 is measured, the analog output issues 40% of its upper limit (i.e. 8 mA)
If a power factor of leading 1 is measured, the analog output issues 50% of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a power factor of lagging 0.9 is measured, the analog output issues 55% of its upper limit (i.e. 11 mA)
If a generator current of 100 A (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a generator current of 1100 A (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a generator current of 600 A is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a generator current of 300 A is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
If a mains current of 100 A (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a mains current of 1100 A (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a mains current of 600 A is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a mains current of 300 A is measured, the analog output issues 20 % of its upper limit (i.e. 4 mA)
Rated Speed
The measured speed refers to the rated speed (parameter 1601 on page 37).
If a speed of 0 rpm is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a speed of 1800 rpm (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a speed of 900 rpm is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a speed of 1500 rpm is measured, the analog output issues ~83 % of its upper limit (i.e. 16.7 mA)
Battery Voltage
The measured battery and auxiliary excitation voltage refer to the fix rated battery voltage of 24 V.
If a battery voltage of 4.8 V (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a battery voltage of 28.8 V (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a battery voltage of 16.8 V is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a battery voltage of 24 V is measured, the analog output issues 80 % of its upper limit (i.e. 16 mA)
If a busbar 1 voltage of 40 V (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a busbar 1 voltage of 440 V (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a busbar 1 voltage of 240 V is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a busbar 1 voltage of 400 V is measured, the analog output issues 90 % of its upper limit (i.e. 18 mA)
If a value of 20°C (or below) is measured, the analog output issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA)
If a value of 100°C (or above) is measured, the analog output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA)
If a value of 60°C is measured, the analog output issues 50 % of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA)
If a value of 84°C is measured, the analog output issues 80 % of its upper limit (i.e. 16 mA)
Note: Refer to Table 3-122 on page 307 for more information on the fixed display value formats.
Appendix D.
Event History
The event history is a 300-entry FIFO (First In/First Out) memory for logging alarm events and operation states
of the unit. As new event messages are entered into the history, the oldest messages are deleted once 300 events
have occurred. Refer to the Operation Manual 37428 for additional information about the event history.
NOTE
Be sure to be in the appropriate code level to reset the event history. If you have not entered the
correct password for the required code level, the parameters for resetting the event history are not
available (refer to the System Management section on page 32 for more information).
The event history can be reset using the parameter "Clear event log" via the front panel.
Event List
Index English event text German event text Description
14353 AUTO mode BAW AUTO Auto mode
14354 STOP mode BAW STOP Stop mode
14355 MAN mode BAW HAND Manual mode
14700 MCB open NLS AUF MCB open
14701 MCB close NLS ZU MCB close
14702 GCB open GLS AUF GCB open
14703 GCB close GLS ZU GCB close
14704 Mains failure Netzausfall Mains failure
14705 Emergency run Notstrombetrieb Emergency run
14706 Engine is running Aggregat läuft Engine is running
14707 Critical mode Sprinklerbetrieb Critical mode
Table 3-123: Event history - event list
Alarm List
Index English event text German event text Description
1714 EEPROM failure EEPROM Fehler Internal error. EEPROM checksum corrupted.
1912 Gen. overfrequency 1 Gen.Überfrequenz 1 Alarm overfrequency generator threshold 1
1913 Gen. overfrequency 2 Gen.Überfrequenz 2 Alarm overfrequency generator threshold 2
1962 Gen.underfrequency 1 Gen.Unterfrequenz 1 Alarm underfrequency generator threshold 1
1963 Gen.underfrequency 2 Gen.Unterfrequenz 2 Alarm underfrequency generator threshold 2
2012 Gen. overvoltage 1 Gen.Überspannung 1 Alarm overvoltage generator threshold 1
2013 Gen. overvoltage 2 Gen.Überspannung 2 Alarm overvoltage generator threshold 2
2062 Gen. undervoltage 1 Gen.Unterspannung 1 Alarm undervoltage generator threshold 1
2063 Gen. undervoltage 2 Gen.Unterspannung 2 Alarm undervoltage generator threshold 2
2112 Overspeed 1 Überdrehzahl 1 Alarm engine overspeed threshold 1
2113 Overspeed 2 Überdrehzahl 2 Alarm engine overspeed threshold 2
2162 Underspeed 1 Unterdrehzahl 1 Alarm engine underspeed threshold 1
2163 Underspeed 2 Unterdrehzahl 2 Alarm engine underspeed threshold 2
2218 Gen. overcurrent 1 Gen.Überstrom 1 Alarm overcurrent generator threshold 1
2219 Gen. overcurrent 2 Gen.Überstrom 2 Alarm overcurrent generator threshold 2
2220 Gen. overcurrent 3 Gen.Überstrom 3 Alarm overcurrent generator threshold 3
2262 Gen. rev./red. pwr.1 Gen.Rück/Minderlast1 Alarm reverse/reduced power generator threshold 1
2263 Gen. rev./red. pwr.2 Gen.Rück/Minderlast2 Alarm reverse/reduced power generator threshold 2
2314 Gen. overload IOP 1 Gen. Überlast IPB 1 Alarm overload generator IOP threshold 1
2315 Gen. overload IOP 2 Gen. Überlast IPB 2 Alarm overload generator IOP threshold 2
2337 Gen. PF lagging 1 Gen. cos.phi ind. 1 Monitoring generator power factor on exceeding a power factor limit
1. Alarm generator power factor lagging threshold 1.
Appendix E.
Triggering Characteristics
IRated [%]
SP1 < SP2 < SP3
t[SP1] > t[SP2] > t[SP3]
SP3 [%/IRated]
Protected Area
SP2 [%/IRated]
SP1 [%/IRated]
t[min-SP2]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP2] t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1]
engine monitoring active)
(Requirement: delayed
[%]
SP2Hysteresis
SP1Hysteresis
SP2
SP1
Rated value
Minimum
[100 %]
Alarm SP 1
Alarm SP 2
(Alarm limit 1)
(Alarm limit 2)
Monitoring
active
t[min-SP2]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1] t[min-SP2]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1]
engine monitoring active)
(Requirement: delayed
[%]
SP1Hysteresis
SP2Hysteresis
Rated value
SP1
SP2
Minimum
[100 %]
Alarm SP 1
Alarm SP 2
(Alarm limit 1)
(Alarm limit 2)
Monitoring
active
t [s]
t [s]
t [s]
t [s]
t[min-SPrev
t[min-SPred]
t[min-SPrev]
t[min-SPred]
t[min-SPred]
t[min-SPred]
engine monitoring active)
(Requirement: delayed
[%]
SPredHysteresis
SPrevHysteresis
Rated value
SPred
Minimum
SPrev
[100 %]
[0 %]
Alarm SP 1
Alarm SP 2
(Alarm limit 1)
(Alarm limit 2)
Monitoring
active
t[min-SP2]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP2] t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1]
t[min-SP1]
engine monitoring active)
(Requirement: delayed
Minimum
Limit 2 Hysteresis
Limit 1 Hysteresis
Limit 2
Limit 1
Average value
Alarm SP 2
Alarm SP1
(Alarm limit 1)
(Alarm limit 2)
Monitoring
active
t[min-SP]
t[min-SP]
t[min-SP]
t[min-SP]
engine monitoring active)
(Requirement: delayed
Minimum
Limit
Limit Hysteresis
Average value
Monitoring
(Alarm limit)
Alarm
active
Appendix F.
Characteristics Of The VDO Inputs
Since VDO sensors are available in various different types, the Index Numbers of the characteristic curve tables
are listed. The customer must observe to order a sensor with the correct characteristic curve when selecting a
VDO sensor. Manufacturers of VDO sensors usually list these tables in their catalogs.
200
180
160
140
120
R [Ohm]
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
P [bar]
Figure 3-42: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 5 bar, Index "III"
200
180
160
140
120
R [Ohm]
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P [bar]
Figure 3-43: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 10 bar, Index "IV"
400
350
300
250
R [Ohm]
200
150
100
50
0
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
Temp. [°C]
Figure 3-44: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 40 to 120 °C, Index "92-027-004"
Temp. [°C] 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Temp. [°F} 104 113 122 131 140 149 158 167 176
R [Ohm] 291.46 239.56 197.29 161.46 134.03 113.96 97.05 82.36 70.12
Temp. [°C] 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
Temp. [°F} 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248
R [Ohm] 59.73 51.21 44.32 38.47 33.40 29.12 25.53 22.44
Table 3-127: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 40 to 120 °C, Index "92-027-004"
400
350
300
250
R [Ohm]
200
150
100
50
0
45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155
Temp. [°C]
Figure 3-45: Analog inputs - characteristics diagram VDO 50 to 150 °C, Index "92-027-006"
Pt100 RTD
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Appendix G.
LDSS Formulas
The following formulas are used by the load-dependent start/stop function to determine whether a genset is to be
started or stopped.
Abbreviations
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
PGN real active Momentary active generator real power on the busbar
Prated active Momentary active generator rated power on the busbar
Preserve Prated active – PGN real active
Preserve isolated Parameter 5760; minimum permissible reserve power on busbar in isolated operation
Physteresis IOP Parameter 5761; hysteresis in isolated operation
PMN setpoint Export / import power control setpoint
PMN real Momentary active power at the interchange point
PMOP minimum Parameter 5767; minimum requested generator load
Preserve parallel Parameter 5768; minimum permissible reserve power on busbar in mains parallel operation
Physteresis MOP Parameter 5769; hysteresis in mains parallel operation
Pmax. load isolated Parameter 5762; maximum permissible generator load in isolated operation
Pmin. load isolated Parameter 5763; minimum permissible generator load in isolated operation
Pmax. load parallel Parameter 5770; maximum permissible generator load in mains parallel operation
Pmin. load parallel Parameter 5771; minimum permissible generator load in mains parallel operation
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power (except dynamic set point is not
matched)
PGN real active < Pmin. load isolated
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power (except dynamic set point is not
matched)
PGN real active < Pmin. load parallel
LDSS Dynamic
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Dynamic characteristic = [(max. generator load – min. generator load) * dynamic] + (min. generator load)
Constants:
Low dynamic = 25 %
Moderate dynamic = 50 %
High dynamic = 75 %
Appendix H.
Service Options
CAUTION
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read and observe the
precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Packing A Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
NOTE
We highly recommend that you make arrangement in advance for return shipments. Contact a
Woodward customer service representative at +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 for instructions and for a
Return Authorization Number.
Replacement Parts
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
• the part numbers P/N (XXXX-XXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
• the unit serial number S/N, which is also on the nameplate.
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29
70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 (8.00 - 16.30 German time)
Fax: +49 (0) 711 789 54-100
e-mail: stgt-info@woodward.com
For assistance outside Germany, call one of the following international Woodward facilities to obtain the address
and phone number of the facility nearest your location where you will be able to get information and service.
You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department or consult our worldwide directory on
Woodward’s website (www.woodward.com) for the name of your nearest Woodward distributor or service
facility. [For worldwide directory information, go to www.woodward.com/ic/locations.]
Engineering Services
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
Woodward Industrial Controls Engineering Services offers the following after-sales support for Woodward
products. For these services, you can contact us by telephone, by e-mail, or through the Woodward website.
• Technical support
• Product training
• Field service during commissioning
Technical Support is available through our many worldwide locations, through our authorized distributors, or
through GE Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This service can assist you with technical
questions or problem solving during normal business hours. Emergency assistance is also available during non-
business hours by phoning our toll-free number and stating the urgency of your problem. For technical
engineering support, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and
reference technical support.
Product Training is available on-site from several of our worldwide facilities, at your location, or from GE
Global Controls Services, depending on the product. This training, conducted by experienced personnel, will
assure that you will be able to maintain system reliability and availability. For information concerning training,
please contact us via our toll-free or local phone numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference customer
training.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product and location, from our facility in
Colorado, or from one of many worldwide Woodward offices or authorized distributors. Field engineers are
experienced on both Woodward products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface. For field service engineering assistance, please contact us via our toll-free or local phone
numbers, e-mail us, or use our website and reference field service.
Technical Assistance
≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡≡
If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information. Please write
it down here before phoning:
Contact
Your company ____________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Please be sure you have a list of all parameters available. You can print this using ToolKit. Additionally you can
save the complete set of parameters (standard values) and send them to our Service department via e-mail.
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29 - 70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone +49 (0) 711 789 54-0 • Fax +49 (0) 711 789 54-100
stgt-info@woodward.com
Homepage
http://www.woodward.com/power
2009/06/Stuttgart